Script | Spoken-Tutorial - User contributions [en]

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Grading-Assignments-and-Reports-in-Moodle/English

2020-02-06T07:14:51Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with " {| style="border-spacing:0;" | style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''''Visual..."

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Assignment grading and Report generation '''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Assignment grading and Report generation '''in''' Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Review online and offline assignment submissions
* Give '''feedback''' on submissions
* Edit '''grades''' for assignments and
* Generate various grade '''reports''' in '''Moodle'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This tutorial is recorded using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 '''
and

* '''Firefox '''web browser
You may use any '''web browser''' of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Assumptions

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This tutorial assumes that

* your '''site administrator''' has registered you as a '''teacher'''
* And assigned at least one '''course''' to you.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Assumptions... continued
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| It also assumes that

* you have added some '''course''' material, '''assignments''' and '''quizzes''' for your '''course''' and
* you have some '''student logins'''
* If not, please refer to the relevant '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Before we begin, let me show you how a student will submit an '''assignment'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter [http://127.0.0.1/moodle/ http://127.0.0.1/moodle/]

Login as student '''Priya Sinha'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I have logged in as student '''Priya Sinha''' right now.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''

Click on '''Assignment 1 - Evolutes and Involutes'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| In the left panel, click the following as shown.

'''My courses, Calculus '''and '''Assignment 1 - Evolutes and Involutes.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I can see the details of the assignment and the '''Submission status''' like due date, etc.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Add submission'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Add submission''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down and highlight the sections
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The '''assignment''' allows both '''Online text''' as well as '''File submission'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Show the file in file manager
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me upload a document with my solutions for this '''assignment'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Text box
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The submission file '''Assign1-Q1-soln.odt''' is available in the '''Code files link''' of this tutorial.

Please download and use it.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Drag and drop my file
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I”ll drag and drop my file here.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Save changes'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down and click on the '''Save changes''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the submission status row
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The '''submission status''' says '''Draft (not submitted).'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| We can also add a comment or edit this submission before finally submitting it.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Submit assignment'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down and click on '''Submit assignment''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Continue'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click '''Continue''' to confirm the submission.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the submission status row

Highlight the grading status
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The '''submission status''' has now changed to '''Submitted for grading'''.

The '''grading status''' shows '''Not graded.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the row '''Attempt number'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Note that there are only 2 attempts allowed.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| That is because the teacher has set this to be opened manually.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| It can be attempted again only if the teacher allows it from her login.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Logout of''' Priya Sinha’s''' account
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me '''logout''' from '''Priya’s''' account now.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Slide 6''':

To proceed further…..

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Ensure that all your students have attempted the assignments.

This is important before you review as a teacher.

Pause the tutorial and attempt the assignment for at least 5 students.

I have already done so for my students.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Username: '''becky0808'''

Password: '''Spokentutorial12#'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will now '''login''' as teacher '''Rebecca Raymond'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''

Click on '''Assignment 1 - Evolutes and Involutes'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| In the left panel, click the following as shown.

'''My courses, Calculus '''and '''Assignment 1 - Evolutes and Involutes.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| We can see the description and the '''Grading summary''' on this page.

The number of submissions and the ones required for grading are also listed here.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''View All submissions'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''View All submissions''' link.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the submission table
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This will open a page.

Here, we can see the details of all the students who attempted the assignments.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to Participant32 , Participant 33 etc
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Note that there are no names against the submissions.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This is because the assignment was marked for '''blind grading'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Close the drawer menu
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me close the navigation menu on the left for a larger view.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Now let’s understand this page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| At the top of the page click on the '''Grading action''' drop-down.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| It has 4 options:

# '''Download all submissions'''
# '''Reveal student identities'''
# '''Upload multiple feedback files in a zip and'''
# '''View gradebook'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let us go through them one by one.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Download all submissions'''

Download the zip file.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Select the option '''Download all submissions.'''

This will download all the student submissions in a '''zip file'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Show the file in file manager.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I have already downloaded and extracted the zip file on my system.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the folders for each student
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Every student’s online text submission and file submission are in a folder.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to the folders
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I have 5 submissions, so I can see folders for Participant 34 to 38.

The participant names could be different for you.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Open the folder named '''Participant_38_assignsubmission_file_'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me open the assignment submission folder for '''Participant 38'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Open the file '''Assignment1-Q1-soln.odt'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Open the file '''Assignment1-Q1-soln.odt''' submitted by the student.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Add a comment at the end:

Feedback:

'''Your answer is correct. See if you can arrive at this answer using some other method. '''

Save the file as '''Assignment1-Q1-Feedback.odt'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will add a comment to the file as shown.

Then I’ll save it as '''Assignment1-Q1-Feedback.odt'''.

And close the file.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Only narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| It is not mandatory to save the file as a different file.

I have done this so the student knows the file is different from her solution file.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Copy the file '''Solution-Evolutes and Involutes.pdf''' to the folder '''Participant_1_assignsubmission_file_'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will also add the solution file to the folder.

I have saved the file as''' Solution-Evolutes and Involutes.pdf'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Text box
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This file is available in the '''Code files''' section of the tutorial

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This is helpful if you have many submissions and you prefer to grade them offline.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Slide:

Assignment
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.

* Add feedback to submissions made by other students.
* Select all the student folders (with the submission inside) and zip.
* Name the zip file as '''assignment1-feedback.zip'''.
* You can choose a name of your choice for the zip file.

Resume the tutorial when done.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Switch to the browser.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let us go back to the '''browser'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select the option
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| In the '''Grading action''' drop-down, the next option is to '''Reveal student identities'''.

A confirmation box opens when this is selected.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Slide 7:

Reveal Student Identities in Moodle

* Use this option with caution
* This action cannot be undone
* You have to reveal student identities after the submission
* Else students will not be able to view their '''grades'''

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This option has to be used with caution.

That is because the action cannot be undone.

Also note that you have to reveal student identities after the submission.

Unless you do this, students will not be able to view their '''grades'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Cancel '''button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me cancel this right now.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight '''Upload multiple feedback files in a zip'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Grading action''' drop-down.

The next option is '''Upload multiple feedback files in a zip.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This enables teachers to send''' feedback files''' back to all students in one single action.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| We will upload the feedback file '''assignment1-feedback.zip'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Upload multiple feedback files in a zip'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Upload multiple feedback files in a zip '''option in the drop-down.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Drag '''assignment1-feedback.zip'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Drag the '''feedback zip file''' to the upload area.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Import feedback files'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Import feedback files''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can see a screen with the name of the files that have been modified.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on the '''Confirm''' button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on the '''Confirm''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight:

Users with updated feedback: 5

Feedback files updated: 0

Feedback files added: 13
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The next page shows the status of the upload.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Continue''' button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Continue''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| We are back in the submissions page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the submissions table
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Below the '''Grading action''' drop-down is the table with submissions for all students.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Every row in the table represents one student.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the dropdown
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Below the table, click on the drop-down '''With selected...'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to the options in the table.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The options in this drop-down are for selected users.

We can select users from the checkbox on the left of each row.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| We will come to this drop-down later.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the filters
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Below this drop-down is the '''Options '''section.

It has filters to narrow down our list.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the scroll
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Note the horizontal scroll below the table.

If you cannot see some of the columns in the table, you can scroll to the right.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let us come back to the submissions now.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Grade '''button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on the '''Grade''' button to grade an individual submission.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| We can see the submission on the left and a panel on the right.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the fields in the right panel
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Here we can add comments, put the grades and leave feedback for the submission.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The left panel is more like an editor.

This is where we can add notes or highlight the submitted document.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Explore this toolbar on your own.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"|

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Grade '''-> 76.

'''Feedback comment '''-> Good job!
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| On the right panel, I will give the grade as 76 and add a '''feedback comment.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on the Save''' changes '''button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| When done, click on the '''Save changes '''button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''OK''' button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''OK''' button to confirm the changes.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Now, click on the assignment name '''link''' at the top left of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''View all submissions'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''View all Submissions '''link at the bottom of this page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the grade
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Notice that the '''grade''' is now shown next to the '''grade''' button.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on the dropdown.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Below the submissions table is another drop-down menu.

This allows the teacher to lock or unlock a submission.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on the checkbox to the left of the row.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will select the submission that I just graded.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Locking a submission freezes the submission.

No further changes can be made by the student after this.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Lock submission'''.

Click on '''Go '''button.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Lock submission''' and click on the '''Go '''button on its right.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Ok'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Ok''' in the confirmation box.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the status message
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The status of the assignment now says '''Submission changes not allowed'''.

The teacher however, can edit the grades if required.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''With selected… '''dropdown and highlight '''Unlock submissions'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Unlocking, on the other hand, unlocks any locked assignment.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Grading options '''dropdown
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| After you have finished grading, click on the '''Grading action '''drop-down.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Reveal student identities'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Now, select '''Reveal student identities'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Continue'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Read the notice in the confirmation box and click the '''Continue''' button.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the columns with students name and email ID
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Note that the students’ names and email IDs are now revealed in the rows.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Students will be able to view their grades now.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on the '''Grading Action''' drop-down and select '''View Gradebook'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight '''Grader report'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| We will be redirected to a page with the title '''Grader Report.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| '''Grader report''' is a comprehensive report for all students.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the report
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| All the grades for each student can be found in this report by default.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''P'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can filter these by students’ names by clicking on the alphabets here.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Single View''' tab
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Next, click on the tab '''Single View'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| '''Single View report '''has 2 drop-downs:

* '''Select grade item: '''Selecting any item will show '''grades''' of all students for that activity
* '''Select user''':

This will show '''grades''' of all activities for that user.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Assignment 1 - Evolutes and Involutes '''from '''Select grade item...''' dropdown
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me select '''Assignment 1 - Evolutes and Involutes '''from the '''Select grade item '''dropdown.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I can see the list of all enrolled students along with details of their attempts.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the grade and feedback boxes.

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| It is possible to modify either one or bulk '''grades''' from this page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select the '''Override''' checkbox next to '''Priya Sinha'''.

Append '''I am pleased with your progress''' in Priya Sinha’s feedback box.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can also override or exclude students from the column on the right.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Check '''Perform bulk insert'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| To modify grades in bulk, check the checkbox '''Perform bulk insert.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Empty grades''' in the '''For''' dropdown.

Enter''' 0''' in the '''Insert value''' text box.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Empty grades''' in the '''For''' dropdown.

Enter''' 0''' in the '''Insert value''' text box.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on the '''Save''' button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on the '''Save''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Continue''' button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Continue''' button after you see the success message.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Notice that all the empty '''grade''' boxes now have '''0'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''User Report '''tab
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let us now see the '''User report'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| '''User report''' shows a breakdown of the '''grades''' for each assessment for every student.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down to see the assignments and quizzes.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select''' Priya Sinha''' from '''Select all or one user''' dropdown
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| On the top right of the report is a drop-down to select a user.

Let me select '''Priya Sinha'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| tudeClick on the dropdown to show the options.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Teachers have the option to view the report as the selected user or as a teacher.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Every report shown here can be exported in various formats.

Let me export this user report.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Export '''tab
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on the '''Export''' tab one level above the various reports.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the various tabs as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The reports can be downloaded in 4 formats:

* '''OpenDocument Spreadsheet'''
* '''Plain text file'''
* '''Excel Spreadsheet and'''
* '''XML file'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Excel spreadsheet'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will click on '''OpenDocument spreadsheet'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| There are various filters that you can use to filter your export.

By default all grade items are included.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on Select all/none link.

Check '''Assignment 1 - Evolutes and Involutes'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me select '''Assignment 1 - Evolutes and Involutes'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Export format options'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Export format options''' to expand the section.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Check the checkbox '''Include feedback in export'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Check the checkbox '''Include feedback in export'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Download''' button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Then click on the '''Download''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Save File'''

Click '''OK'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Save File''' option and then click '''OK''' to save the file.

I have already saved the file on my system.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Open the file
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me open and review the file which downloaded on my machine.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| <nowiki><PAUSE></nowiki>

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 10''':

Summary
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt how to:

* Review online and offline assignment submissions
* Give '''feedback''' on submissions.
* Edit '''grades''' for assignments and
* Generate various grade '''reports''' in '''Moodle'''

|-
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The video at the following link summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 14:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 15:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 16:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This script has been contributed by Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Grading-Quiz-in-Moodle/English

2019-10-14T12:46:21Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Grading quiz in Moodle'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Grading quiz '''in''' Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Review quiz attempts submitted by students
* Edit questions in a quiz
* Regrade attempts
* Delete quiz attempts and
* Download quiz results

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This tutorial is recorded using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 ''' and
* '''Firefox '''web browser

You may use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Assumptions

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This tutorial assumes that

* your '''site administrator''' has registered you as a '''teacher'''
* And assigned at least one '''course''' to you.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Assumptions... continued

* you have added some course material, assignments and quizzes for your '''course'''
* you have some student logins
* If not, please refer to the relevant '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| It also assumes that

* you have added some course material, assignments and quizzes for your '''course''' and
* you have some student logins
* If not, please refer to the relevant '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me show you how a student will attempt the quiz that we created earlier in the series.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter [http://127.0.0.1/moodle/ http://127.0.0.1/moodle/]

Login as student Priya Sinha
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I have logged in as student '''Priya Sinha''' right now.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''

Click on '''Quiz 1 - Evolutes and Involutes'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will click on '''Calculus''' under '''My courses'''.

Then I will click on '''Quiz 1 - Evolutes and Involutes'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Attempt Quiz now >> '''Click on '''Start attempt'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will click on '''Attempt Quiz now''' button and then confirm my selection.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The question paper is presented to me.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to the '''Quiz navigation''' block.

Point to the question numbers, the timer and the '''Finish attempt '''link.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| On the right, we see the '''Quiz navigation block.'''

It displays all the question numbers, the timer and the '''Finish attempt '''link.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the '''Quiz navigation''' block.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The questions in the first page are highlighted in the '''Quiz navigation''' block.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Attempt questions - should be fast-forwarded during editing
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will begin attempting questions in both the sections.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the '''Next Page''' button.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| There are buttons for previous and next pages, depending on which page you are in.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Attempt the quiz
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me attempt the questions.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''2 '''to go back to question 2
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I can go back to any question if I need to review it, from the '''Quiz navigation block'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight '''Flag question''' link
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| On the left of the question, notice that there is an option to flag the question.

A flagged question has a red triangle at the top right of the question.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| One can flag a question in order to

* Go back and review it later, before submitting the attempt
* Or to discuss the topic with the teacher

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Flag question'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The question will remain flagged until the student specifically removes the flag.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| There are some other markers related to quiz questions.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| * A grey marker indicates an answered question.
* A small red triangle below the question number indicates an incomplete answer.
* A totally white box indicates an unanswered question.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| As mentioned earlier, I can click on any question to go back to that question.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Finish attempt...'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| When I am done, I will click on '''Finish attempt...''' link in the '''Quiz navigation block'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to '''Finish attempt '''button
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I can also click on '''Finish attempt''' button at the end of the quiz.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Submit all and finish'''

Click on '''Submit all and finish'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Submit all and finish''' button and confirm my selection.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight score and grade.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Students can see the '''marks''' and '''grade''' scored in a quiz right after the submission.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The quiz navigation block also has color-coded number boxes.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| * A green marker with a tick-mark indicates correct answer
* A red marker indicates either a wrong or unattempted question
* A brown marker with a white circle indicates a partially correct answer.
* A red triangle marker at the top-right is for flagged questions

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let us go back to the course page by clicking on '''Calculus''' in the breadcrumbs.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Quiz 1 - Evolutes and Involutes'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me click on the quiz name.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Review'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I can see my attempt here and a '''Review''' link.

I can review my quiz attempt by clicking on the '''Review''' link.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight a feedback.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down to see the feedback given for every answer.

This is a general feedback that every student sees after their attempt.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on quick access user menu >> Click on '''Logout'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me log out of this student’s dashboard.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Slide 6''':

To proceed further…..

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Before reviewing the quiz as a teacher, ensure that all your students have attempted the quiz.

Pause the tutorial and attempt the quiz for at least 5 students, before proceeding further.

I have already done so for my students.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Username: '''becky0808'''

Password: '''Spokentutorial12#'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Now, I will login as teacher '''Rebecca Raymond'''.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Calculus''' under '''My courses''' on the left.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Quiz 1 - Evolutes and Involutes'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down and click on '''Quiz 1 - Evolutes and Involutes.'''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can see quiz description and quiz timeline in this page.

The number of attempts are also listed here.

In my case, it is 5.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Attempts:5'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Now, click on '''Attempts''' link.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the filters
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| There are some filters at the top of the page, which are self-explanatory.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to the filters >> Scroll down
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can use these if there are many students enrolled in your course.

I will leave them as they are and scroll down.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on drawer menu on top right to close.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me close the '''navigation''' menu on the left for better view.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down and highlight attempts
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Notice that all the attempts are listed in a table here.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Review attempt '''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Review attempt '''link below '''Priya Sinha’s''' name.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to the questions
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You may see a different set of questions than the ones I see.

That is because we added random questions from the question bank, while creating the quiz.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Only narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The students will see different questions or a different order of questions, when they attempt.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the overview.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| We can see a brief overview of the attempt.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight '''Time taken'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| '''Priya Sinha''' finished the quiz in 3 minutes and 12 seconds.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight '''Marks''' and '''Grade'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| She also got 1.2 out of 4 marks and 30%.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This will give you an idea of how the student performed in the quiz.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight '''Quiz Navigation'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Look at the''' Quiz navigation block''' at the right.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The green box with a tick mark indicates that the student got full marks for the answer.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The red box indicates that the student answered the question incorrectly.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The brown box with a white circle in between indicates partially correct answer.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can go to any question directly by clicking on that question number.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the link '''Show one page at a time'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can also change the layout if you want to show the questions one page at a time.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down to 1st question and highlight as per narration.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can see the answers and the marks scored against each question.

You can also see the common feedback shown to the student.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight response history
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| There is also a response history with a log of what the student did.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the log and point to the rows with the status “Answer saved”
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Notice here that the student saved this answer once before finally submitting it.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to the feedback textbox

Point to Override
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| As a teacher, you can add a specific comment for any answer, if you wish to.

You can also override the marks. Let’s see how to do this.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Make comment or override marks'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Make comment or override marks''' link below the common feedback section.

A new window opens up.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Comment -> '''The correct sequence is ii, iv, i, iii. I will give you partial credit for getting the last 3 steps correct. Be careful in marking next time.'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Type the desired '''comment''', as shown here.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Mark ->''' 0.75'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will also change the marks as shown here.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on''' Save'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down and click on the '''Save''' button.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the comment.

Highlight the last row in response history.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Your '''comment''' is now shown below the common feedback.

Response history also has a log of the changes you made.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Scroll up to see marks and grades.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Notice that the marks and grade have also changed based on your new manual grading.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight '''Quiz Navigation''' block
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Look at the''' Quiz Navigation''' block now.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the 1st question with changed color.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The color of the box for which you awarded partial marks, has now changed.

A white circle indicates partial marks.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Edit question'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can also edit a question from an attempt itself.

Click on '''Edit question''' link on the left.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Point to the question

Point to the options of grades
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This will take you to the edit screen where you can make changes to the question.

You can also change the options of grades associated with it.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Textbox on screen-

This will change the question for all students who have already attempted the quiz.

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Note that this will change the question for all students who have already attempted the quiz.

This will also change the question for future quizzes.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I realize now that I had marked the wrong answer while creating this quiz.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Change the grade for Answer 2 to 0%

Error for Answer 3 -> 0.5

Change the grade for Answer 3 to 100%

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I will change the grade for these 2 options.

I will also change the Error field for Answer 3.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Save changes'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Save changes''' button when done.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Finish review '''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Finish review '''link when you are done.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Attempts: 5'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Attempts''' link again.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| If you changed any question, you should regrade the attempts based on the new grading.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Scroll down and click on the '''Select all''' link.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Regrade all'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Regrade all '''button.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight '''Regrade completed successfully'''

Click on '''Continue'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You will see a message '''Regrade completed successfully.'''

Click on '''Continue''' button.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the rows '''Priya Sinha''' and '''Susmitha''' whose grades have changed.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Notice that the grade for that question changed for some of the students.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| You can also delete a particular attempt if you wish to.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on the checkbox next to Priya Sinha.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on the checkbox next to the name of the student whose attempt you want to delete.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on''' Delete selected attempts'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Then click on''' Delete selected attempts''' button. But I will not do this right now.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the dropdown to select the format and download.
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The teacher also has the option to download all the attempts in various file formats.

Let me demonstrate how.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Scroll up to the section '''What to include in the report '''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Scroll up to the section '''What to include in the report '''

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Highlight the fields
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| I can filter the reports based on various criteria.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select '''enrolled users who have attempted the quiz''' from the '''Attempts from dropdown'''.

Uncheck the options '''In progress''', '''Overdue''' and '''Never submitted'''

Click on '''Show Report '''button

| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me download the report for all enrolled students who have attempted the quiz.

I will uncheck rest of the checkboxes under '''Attempts that are''' to narrow it down to see the finished reports

Click on '''Show Report''' button

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on the dropdown '''Download table data as'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Click on the dropdown '''Download table data as''' at the top right above the report table.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Select '''Comma Separated values (.CSV)'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Select '''OpenDocument (.ods) '''from the options.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Click on '''Download'''

Click on '''Save'''
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Then click on the '''Download''' button next to it.

Save the file on your local machine.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| Open the file
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Let me open the file.

You can see the details of the attempts here.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| <nowiki><PAUSE></nowiki>

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 7''':

Summary
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt how to:

* Review quiz attempts submitted by students
* Edit questions in a quiz
* Regrade attempts
* Delete quiz attempts and
* Download quiz results

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 8-9:'''

Assignment
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Here is a small assignment for you.

* Review the attempt of any other student
* Post question-specific comments

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 12:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"| '''Show Slide 13:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0cm;"|
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0cm;"| This script has been contributed by Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Plugins-in-Moodle/English

2019-06-21T11:03:24Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with " {| style="border-spacing:0;" | style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue''''' | style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration''''..."

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Installing plugins in Moodle'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on''' Installing plugins in Moodle'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* '''Plugins '''and
* How to install a '''plugin''' in '''Moodle'''
|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

Versions and OS
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| To record this tutorial, I will be using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB and PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3'''
* '''Firefox web browser''' and
* Working '''Internet''' connection

You can use any '''web browser''' of your choice.

However, internet explorer should be avoided as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Prerequisites
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| * Learners of this tutorial should have some '''courses''' and '''users''' in their '''Moodle''' website.
* If not, please refer to the relevant''' Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Show Slide 5:

Moodle plugins
| style="background-color:transparent;border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| What are plugins?

* Plugins are add-on tools that add special features to an existing software
* Moodle has several useful plugins for teachers as well as site administrators
* These are available in the plugins directory
|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Open the '''browser''' and type [https://moodle.org/plugins/ https://moodle.org/plugins/]
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Open the '''browser''' and type [https://moodle.org/plugins/ https://moodle.org/plugins/]

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the filter section
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The page has filters based on '''Purpose '''and''' Plugin Type'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the search box
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There is also a '''search''' box, for custom search.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the statistics.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are some numbers displayed at the top right.

The text below indicates what they are.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn how to install the '''attendance plugin.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type '''attendance'''
Click on the '''search''' button.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type '''attendance''' in the '''search''' box and click on the '''Search''' button.

We see that there are multiple '''plugins''' having this keyword, either in their title or description.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Attendance'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Attendance plugin'''.

The description reads “'''A plugin that allows an attendance log to be kept.'''”

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the '''Activities:Attendance'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| To verify that you have clicked on the same '''plugin''' that I mentioned, check the title on the new page.

It should say '''Activities:Attendance '''as the title.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This '''plugin''' allows a teacher to keep an '''attendance log''' in '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Before installing any new '''plugin''', ensure that it is available for the '''Moodle''' version you are using.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Versions'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| To verify, click on the '''Versions''' link to see the versions that it supports.

Scroll down to see that it is available for our version of '''Moodle 3.3'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Go back to the '''Description''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the description text box.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Read the description to understand whether the '''plugin''' fulfills your purpose.

It also mentions prerequisites for using the '''plugin''' and the usage instructions, if any.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the icons to indicate number of websites, fans.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We can see that it is being used on a number of websites and has many fans.

This authenticates that the '''plugin''' is useful and easy to use.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the forum.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You may also want to scroll down and see the questions others have asked related to this '''plugin'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Versions'''.

Click on '''Download. '''

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| When you are convinced you want to install the '''plugin''', go back to the '''Versions''' link.

Click on the '''Download''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Save the file
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Save the file on your local system. I have already saved it in my system.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter [http://127.0.0.1/moodle/ http://127.0.0.1/moodle/]

Click on '''Log in''' link >> Type admin username and password >> Click on '''Log in''' button.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Open a new tab and login to your '''Moodle''' website as '''site administrator'''.

Make sure that the '''XAMPP service''' is running.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are now in the '''admin dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Site Administration''' on the left side.

Then click on '''plugins''' tab and then on '''Install Plugins '''link.

There are 2 ways to install a '''plugin''' -

* through '''Moodle plugins directory''' and
* through a '''zip''' upload.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will cover the second method only.

The first method requires us to have an account on '''moodle.org''', hence we are skipping it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Choose a file'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Choose a file''' button next to '''Zip package'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload a file'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload a file''' link on the left, if it is not already selected.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Choose a file'''
Select the zip file
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Browse''' button and browse to the location where you have saved the '''plugin''' file.

Select the zip file which we downloaded earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload this file'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on '''Upload this file''' button at the bottom of this window.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Install plugin from the zip file'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now click on '''Install plugin from the zip file''' button at the bottom.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the error message.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You may encounter an error in this page.

The error message says

'''Validating mod_attendance ... Error'''

'''<nowiki>[Error] Write access check [/opt/lampp/htdocs/moodle/mod] </nowiki>'''

'''Installation aborted due to validation failure'''

Click on the '''Cancel''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This is an indicator for us to give''' write permission''' to this directory.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Press '''Ctrl + Alt + T'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| So open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Control + Alt + T''' keys.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type '''sudo chmod 777 /opt/lampp/htdocs/moodle/mod/'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type '''sudo space chmod space 777 space slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs slash moodle slash mod slash '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Enter administrative password
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Enter your administrative password if prompted and press '''Enter'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Choose a file'''

Click on '''Browse'''

Select the zip file

Click on '''Upload this file'''

Click on '''Install plugin from the zip file'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us go back to the browser and repeat the process.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Continue'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This time we get the validation successful message. Click on the '''Continue''' button.

Please note that this additional step is required only if you get the above error screen.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, the '''plugin''' is downloaded and validated for this version of '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next, we will get a page with the title '''Plugins check'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the icon in green.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice the '''status''' information in green here, which says '''To be installed.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upgrade moodle database now'''. Click on '''Continue'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upgrade Moodle database now''' button.

This step may take some time. Please do not refresh or close the '''browser '''window.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Continue'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| When you see the success message, then click on the '''Continue''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are now in the '''New settings''' page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down the page
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Go through all the '''settings''' to see if you need to change any of them.

I do not wish to make any changes.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save changes'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| After checking, click on the '''Save Changes''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the warning messages.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You may see some warning messages which you can ignore for the time being.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Site Administration -> Plugins -> Plugins Overview'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| To see if the '''plugin '''is installed successfully, click on '''Site Administration '''in the left panel'''.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on '''Plugins tab '''and then''' Plugins Overview'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''All plugins''' and '''Additional plugins '''and their nos. above the table
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This will show you the list of all '''plugins'''

* the ones which were installed by default and
* the ones you installed.

On my site, it shows these many '''plugins''' are installed.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Additional plugins'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| To see the '''plugins''' that were additionally installed, click on '''Additional plugins''' link above the table.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the '''Settings''' and '''uninstall this plugin''' link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here there are links to go to the '''settings''' and '''uninstall''' the '''plugin''' from this page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Teachers''' and '''administrators''' can now create '''attendance''' for their '''courses'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Site Administration -> Courses -> Manage Courses and categories'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Once again click on '''Site administration''' in the left panel.

Then click on '''Courses''' and '''Manage Courses and categories'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''1st year Maths'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''1st year Maths''' in the '''Course category''' on the left.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''

Click on '''View'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus course''' on the right.

Scroll down to the '''Calculus course''' details section and click on '''View''' tab to view the '''Calculus course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on gear -> '''Turn editing on'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''gear icon''' at the top right and then click on '''Turn editing on'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add an activity or resource'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add an activity or resource''' at the bottom right of the area before the topics.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Double click on '''Attendance'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Double click on the '''Attendance''' activity to create an attendance.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Name''' -> Attendance

'''Description''' -> Attendance for 1st Year Calculus course
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Enter the name and description as shown here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Expand '''Grade''' section
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Expand the '''Grade''' section.

This dropdown decides the type of grading used for attendance.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| If you want attendance to contribute to the course grade, set a Maximum points value.

The default is 100.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type '''Grade''' -> None
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will select '''Grade''' as '''None'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let the other options be default.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and display'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and click on '''Save and display''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are now in a new page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Status set'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Status set''' tab here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 4 default status for the '''attendance''':

* Present
* Late
* Excused
* Absent

Depending on your requirement, you can either delete these or add more.

You can also modify the status names if you call them something else.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on delete icon next to '''excused''' status
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will delete the '''Excused''' status because I do not use that in my class.

A confirmation message box appears.

Click on the '''Continue''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Add session'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now click on the '''Add session''' tab.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Date''' -> 4th June 2019
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select the date of the first session you want to add.

I will put this as 4th June 2019.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select the start and end time of the session.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Time from''': 15:15 to 16:05
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Note that the time fields use a 24-hour clock.

So a 3:15pm-4:05pm class should be 15:15-16:05.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description -> '''blank
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type a short '''Description''' for the session.

If you leave the description field blank, the description by default will be “'''Regular class session”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Multiple sessions'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Multiple sessions''' section to expand it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| If your class meets at regular intervals, you can create multiple sessions at the same time.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Repeat the session above as follows '''checkbox
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Repeat the session above as follows '''checkbox.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Monday'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| If your class meets on certain days of the week, select the days of the week.

For my class, I will select '''Monday'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Repeat every''' -> 1
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next option is '''Repeat every''' dropdown.

If the class meets every week, select 1.

If the class meets 2 weeks from the date of the first session, select 2 and so on.

I will let this remain as 1.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This means my class meets every Monday at 3:15pm for 50 mins.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Repeat until''' -> 30th March 2020
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Repeat until''' is the date of the last session.

I will put this as '''30th March 2020.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Student recording'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next click on '''Student recording''' section to expand it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| If you want students to record their own attendance, fill up the fields in this section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will skip this section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and click on '''Add''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''50 sessions were successfully generated'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A confirmation message appears saying '''43 sessions were successfully generated.'''

You may see a different no. of sessions, if you selected dates other than mine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the icons
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| See the icons next to each session.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| They let the teacher to take the '''attendance''', edit the session or delete the session.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Take attendance'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Take attendance''' icon for the week that you want to take '''attendance'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You can see a list of all students enrolled in this '''course''' and you can mark their '''attendance'''.

'''P, L''' and '''A''' are the status that we selected in the '''settings''' earlier.

Check the radio button just below ''''P'''' to set status for all users to ''''Present'''' and mark ''''A'''' only for the absentees.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save attendance'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| When you have marked the attendance, click on '''Save attendance''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt about:

* '''Plugins '''and
* How to install a '''plugin '''in '''Moodle'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 9:'''

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is an assignment for you:

* Search for a '''plugin Font family''' maintained by '''Projectes TAC Dept'''.
* Install the '''plugin''' with its default settings.
* Verify from the '''Plugins overview''' section that the '''plugin''' is installed.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 12:'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 13:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Quiz-in-Moodle/English

2018-12-31T16:31:26Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Quiz '''in '''Moodle'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Quiz '''in '''Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Create a '''Quiz''' in '''Moodle '''and
* Use the questions from the '''Question bank''' in the '''Quiz'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This tutorial is recorded using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 '''

and

* And '''Firefox '''web browser

You may use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #ead1dc;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Assumptions

| style="border:1pt solid #ead1dc;padding:0.106cm;"| This tutorial assumes that

* your '''site administrator''' has registered you as a '''teacher'''
* And assigned at least one course to you.

|-
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #ead1dc;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Assumptions... continued
| style="border:1pt solid #ead1dc;padding:0.106cm;"| It also assumes that

* you have added some questions to the question bank for your course.
* If not, please refer to the relevant '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter [http://127.0.0.1/moodle/ http://127.0.0.1/moodle/]

Username: '''becky0808'''

Password: '''Spokentutorial12#'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser and login to your '''Moodle site.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Calculus course '''in the left''' navigation menu.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''gear icon''' at the top right and then on '''Turn Editing On'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' Add an activity or resource'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add an activity or resource''' link at the bottom right of the '''Basic Calculus''' section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Quiz'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and select '''Quiz''' in the activity chooser.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add button'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Add '''button''' '''at the bottom of the activity chooser.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Name: '''Quiz 1 - Evolutes and involutes.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''Name '''field, I will type '''Quiz 1 - Evolutes and involutes.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Description: '''This quiz contains 4 questions. It is timed and you get 10 minutes to submit it. Quiz not submitted after 10 mins get submitted automatically. '''

'''You can attempt the quiz once. '''

'''Minimum 2 marks are required to pass the quiz.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then in the '''Description field''', I will type the text as shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the '''Display description on course page''' checkbox.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the '''Display description on course page''' checkbox.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Expand the '''Timing''' section.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| After this, we’ll expand the '''Timing''' section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check '''Open the quiz''', '''close the quiz''' and '''time limit''' checkboxes.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| And enable the checkboxes for '''Open the quiz''', '''Close the quiz''' and '''Time limit'''.

This will open and close the quiz on the given dates and for a specific time duration.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Open the quiz: '''18th Jan 2019'''

'''Time: 11:00'''

Close the quiz: '''18th Jan 2019'''

'''Time: 12:00'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Set the dates and time as per your requirements.

I have set them as displayed here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Time Limit: 10 mins.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then I will set the time limit as 10 mins.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Open '''When time expires '''dropdown.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''When time expires field''' has 3 options.

Choose the one which is appropriate for your '''quiz'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Open attempts are submitted automatically'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will choose '''Open attempts are submitted automatically'''.

So even if the student fails to submit, the '''quiz''' will be automatically submitted after 10 mins.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Expand the '''Grade''' section.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, let’s expand the '''Grade''' section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Grade to Pass '''-> 2
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''Grade to pass field''', I will type '''2''' as the '''passing grade'''.

This means the student will need a minimum of 2 marks to pass this '''quiz'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Attempts allowed -> 1
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''Attempts allowed''' field, I will select '''1'''.

If we choose a higher number, the student will be able to attempt the same quiz, that many times.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Grading method'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice that '''Grading method''' dropdown is disabled.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Grading method'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This is enabled only when more than one attempts are allowed.

The teacher can then select which attempt to grade.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Expand the '''Layout''' section.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now expand the '''Layout '''section.

Here, there are options to specify the layout of the '''quiz'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Every question '''option
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| By default, in the '''New page field''' dropdown, '''Every question '''option is selected.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''New page field''' dropdown
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''New page field''' dropdown to see all the options.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Every 2 questions '''option
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will select '''Every 2 questions '''option.

You can select any option as per your choice.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Expand''' Question behaviour''' section
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next we will expand the '''Question behaviour''' section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Shuffle within questions''' -> Yes
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Choose '''Yes''' for '''Shuffle within questions '''dropdown.

On doing so, all the options within each question, will be shuffled.

So, each student will see a different arrangement of questions and options in their '''quiz'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' question mark '''icon.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the help icon for '''How questions behave '''dropdown and read the details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''How questions behave''' -> Deferred feedback
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will let '''Deferred feedback''' be the option here.

So my students will see the feedback only after their attempt is submitted.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Overall feedback''' section.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next, click on the '''Overall feedback '''section to expand it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Overall feedback''' section.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Overall feedback''' is the text shown to the student after the quiz is submitted and auto-graded.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Teachers can give different '''feedback''' depending on the '''grade''' obtained by the student.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Feedback for Grade boundary 100% -> '''Excellent performance'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will type''' Excellent performance''' as the '''feedback''' for '''grade boundary 100%.'''

Students who score between '''50%''' and '''100%''' will see the "'''Excellent performance'''" message.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Feedback for Grade boundary -> Type 50% -> '''You need to work harder'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| And '''You need to work harder''' as the '''feedback''' for '''grade boundary 50%.'''

Students who score between '''0% '''and '''49.99%''' will see "'''You need to work harder'''".

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Activity completion''' section.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, scroll down and click on '''Activity completion''' section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the dropdown for '''Completion Tracking field'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the dropdown for '''Completion Tracking field'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Completion tracking''' -> Show activity as complete when conditions are met
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select the option '''Show activity as complete when conditions are met.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the checkboxes for '''Require grade '''and '''Require passing grade'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the checkboxes for '''Require grade '''and '''Require passing grade'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and display '''button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Lastly, click on '''Save and display''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the quiz title

Highlight all the other details below.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are brought to a new page with the '''quiz''' title that we gave.

Read and verify that all the details given earlier are displayed here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight message
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here you can see a message displayed prominently - '''No questions have been added yet'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' Edit quiz''' button.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| To add questions to the quiz, click on the '''Edit quiz '''button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Maximum grade''' -> 4
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| On the top right, type the '''Maximum grade '''as 4.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''pencil''' icon.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The pencil icon on the left of the '''quiz''' section allows us to edit the heading of this '''quiz'''.

It is useful when the quiz has multiple sections.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Heading -> '''Section 1'''.Click '''Enter'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will write '''Section 1''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the '''Shuffle''' checkbox
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then check the '''Shuffle''' checkbox on the right.

This ensures that the questions are shuffled every time the '''quiz''' is attempted.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add '''link
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Add''' link below '''Shuffle''' checkbox.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 3 options
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 3 options here:

# '''a new question'''
# '''from question bank'''
# '''a random question'''

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''a new question''' link

| style="background-color:transparent;border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| As the name suggests, '''a new question''' link enables us to add a new question.

So, I will not select this option.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on from question bank link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''from question bank''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A pop-up window opens.

This option is used when you want a fixed set of questions for every student.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The category selected will be the default category for that course.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The option '''Also show questions from subcategories''' is selected by default.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Also show old questions''' shows the questions that have been used in previous quizzes.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select some questions.

Point to '''Add selected questions to the quiz '''button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You can select the questions you want to add, as I am doing now.

And then click on '''Add selected questions to the quiz''' button at the bottom.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''X '''icon on top right.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| However, I will not do that.

I will close this window by clicking on the''' X '''icon at the top right.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add '''link

Click on '''a random question''' link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Add''' link below '''Shuffle''' once again.

Click on''' a random question''' link.

Another pop-up window open.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| With this option, each student will see a different set of questions.

And it will be difficult for them to discuss the answers while attempting the '''quiz'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Category''' -> Evolutes

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Under '''Random question from an existing category''', I will select the category as '''Evolutes'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Number of random questions -> 2
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In '''Number of random questions''', I will select 2.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add random question '''button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on '''Add random question''' button below this dropdown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| 2 random questions have been added to this quiz, from '''Evolutes category'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add '''link
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Once again click on '''Add''' link at the bottom right.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' a random question''' link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''a random question''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Category''' -> Involutes

Number of random questions -> 2
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select the '''category''' as '''Involutes''' and '''Number of random questions''' as 2.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add random question''' button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on '''Add random question''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| 2 more questions have been added to this quiz, both from '''Involutes'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight Page 1 and Page 2
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice that the quiz is automatically divided into 2 pages.

This is because we had given this option earlier in the '''Quiz Settings'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add '''link
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the add link below the 2nd question, at the extreme right.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''a new section heading''' link
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''a new section heading''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on pencil icon.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the pencil icon to edit the name of the heading.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Heading -> '''Section 2'''.Click '''Enter'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will type '''Section 2''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' Save button'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' Save button''' at the top right to save the quiz.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 2 icons to the right of every '''quiz''' question: '''preview question''' and '''delete'''.

These are self-explanatory.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Delete question''' icon.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Delete question''' will delete this question from the quiz.

But the question will still exist in the question bank.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Quiz 1 - Evolutes and involutes.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on name of the '''quiz''' in the breadcrumbs.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Preview quiz''' now
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Preview quiz '''button in the '''gear menu''' at the right.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the message.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This opens up a confirmation window.

This informs the students that the quiz is timed and they have the option to either start or cancel.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Start attempt '''button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will click on '''Start attempt''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Quiz navigation''' block.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| On the right of the screen is the '''Quiz navigation block'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| It shows the questions section-wise along with the timer.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| HIghlight the edit question link on the left of the question.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There is an option to edit the question directly from this screen, as well.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''finish attempt''' link
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let me click on '''Finish attempt''' link in the '''navigation block'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the status.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The status of every question is shown next to the question name.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Submit all and finish '''button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Submit all and finish''' button at the bottom of the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Submit all and finish''' button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Submit all and finish''' button again in the confirmation pop-up.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice that the '''grade, overall feedback''' and question specific''' feedback''' are all shown here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click '''Finish review'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and click on '''Finish review''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are back to the '''quiz summary''' page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''gear icon''' at the top right of the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Edit quiz'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Edit quiz''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You can add or remove questions from the '''quiz'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| However, this can be done only before the '''quiz''' is attempted by any student.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Even if one student has attempted the '''quiz''', the '''quiz''' is locked.

'''Questions''' can however, be edited or added as required.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| <nowiki><PAUSE></nowiki>

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 6''':

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we have learnt how to:

* Create a '''Quiz''' in '''Moodle'''
* Use the questions from the '''Question bank''' in the '''Quiz'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 7:'''

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is a small assignment for you.

* Add a new quiz for evolutes
* Refer to '''Assignment''' link of this tutorial for details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''8:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 9:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Formatting-Course-material-in-Moodle/English

2018-12-10T10:36:17Z

Itspriyanka:

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Formatting Course Material'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Formatting course material '''in '''Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* '''Resources '''in '''Moodle'''
* Adding additional '''course material'''
* '''Formatting''' options in the default '''text editor'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This tutorial is recorded using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 '''

And

* '''Firefox '''web browser

You may use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #ead1dc;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Assumptions

| style="border:1pt solid #ead1dc;padding:0.106cm;"| This tutorial assumes that

* your '''site administrator''' has set up a '''Moodle website'''
* and registered you as a '''teacher.'''

|-
| style="border-top:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Prerequisites
| style="border-top:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| * Learners of this tutorial should have
** a '''teacher login''' on '''Moodle'''
** at least one '''course '''assigned to them by the '''administrator'''
** some course material uploaded for their respective '''course'''
* If not, please refer to the relevant '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter http://127.0.0.1/moodle/
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser and open your '''Moodle site.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Username: '''becky0808'''

Password: '''Spokentutorial12#'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Login with your '''teacher username''' and '''password''' details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are now in the '''teacher dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to Calculus
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''navigation menu''' on the left, notice '''Calculus''' under '''My Courses'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Calculus course.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the course topics and summaries.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We have already added '''announcements''' and some common '''course''' details earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will now add some additional '''course material. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 5: '''Resources in Moodle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| * All '''course material '''in '''Moodle '''are called '''Resources'''.
* These are '''material '''that a teacher uses to support learning.
* '''Resources''' could be internal like lecture notes, books or external like '''Wikipedia links'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' Add an activity or resource'''

Click on gear icon-> '''Turn Editing On'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s begin.

Click on the gear icon at the top right of the page and then on '''Turn Editing On'''.

Note you need to turn the editing on to make any changes to the course.

Click on '''Add an activity or resource''' link at the bottom right of the '''Basic Calculus section. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Page'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A pop-up opens with a list of '''resources'''.

Scroll down and select '''Page''' from the list.

Read the detailed description about the '''resource''' on the right side when you select any '''resource'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add button'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Add button '''at the bottom of the pop-up screen.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Name''': Lecture 1 Notes
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''Name '''field, I will type '''Lecture 1 Notes'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description''': Involutes and construction of Involute of circle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then in the '''Description '''box, type “'''Involutes and construction of Involute of circle”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Display description on course page'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the option '''Display description on course page'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to see the '''Page Content''' box.

Copy and paste the text from '''BasicCalculus-Involutes.odt '''file.

We will be uploading the image at a later stage.

This file is available in the '''Code Files '''link of this tutorial.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on down-arrow
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us now '''format''' this text.

Click on the down-arrow at the top left of the '''editor''' to expand the '''menu widgets'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select heading text

Click on heading dropdown -> Select '''Heading (medium)'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will make the headings more prominent, as shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the options one by one as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The options in the '''text editor''' are similar to any other standard''' text editor'''.

Here we can see options like '''Bold, Italics, Unordered '''and''' Ordered lists.'''

We also see options to '''hyperlink''' and '''unlink''' a text.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the option.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There’s an option to add an image, as well.

Let us add an image after the text “'''Figure 1 shows the involute of a circle”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Press''' Enter.'''

Click on the''' Image icon.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Press '''Enter '''to make space for the image. Then click on the '''Image icon'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Image properties'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''Image properties '''window appears.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the URL field
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| If you want to insert an '''external image''', you can enter the '''URL '''of the '''image '''here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Browse Repositories'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will click on '''Browse Repositories '''button to upload an '''image'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to File Picker
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A pop-up window opens with the title '''File Picker'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload a file''' -> '''Choose File''' Select '''involutes-img1.png'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload a file'''.

Then click on '''Choose File '''or '''Browse''' button and select the file from your machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This '''image''' is also available in the '''Code Files''' link. You can download and use it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload this file.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload this file''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description''': This is the involute of a circle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will type the description as “'''This is the involute of a circle”'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save image'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Lastly, click on '''Save image''' button to insert the '''image'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Add media icon'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next option is to add '''media'''. This could be a''' URL, video''' or '''audio''' file.

Again, this can be an '''external URL''' or can be uploaded from our machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Manage files'''.

Highlight the image already present.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next option is''' Manage Files. '''Let’s click on it.

'''Manage Files''' option is to have a set of files that you want to store and display.

This could include '''assignment submissions, resource files,''' etc.

They can be used by any other '''resource''' in this '''course'''.

Notice that the '''image''' we uploaded just now, is also present here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 3 icons.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 3 '''icons''' on the left of this pop-up box.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on File picker.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| First is the '''File picker'''. Let’s click on it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| It has options to see the '''server files''', '''recent files''', etc.

'''Server files''' are the files which have been used elsewhere in the course and can be reused.

I will close this for now by clicking on the '''X icon.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Create Folder'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next, we will click on '''Create Folder icon''', which is the second '''icon'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''New folder name '''->Assignments
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''New folder name '''field, let’s type '''Assignments'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Assignments''' folder
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on the '''Assignments''' folder to open it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Drag the assignment file.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let me drag my file inside the '''Assignments '''folder.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the uploaded file
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, click on the file that that was just uploaded.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This pop-up has the option to modify the file name and author.

And also to download or delete the file.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Cancel''' button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I don’t wish to change anything.

So I will click on the '''Cancel''' button at the bottom of the pop-up.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 6a: Assignment'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, pause the tutorial and do this small assignment:

* Create a folder '''Reference Material'''.
* Ensure that the folder is inside the '''Files''' folder and not inside the subfolder '''Assignments'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 6b: Assignment'''

'''Upload the 3 reference files:'''

# Ref1-Curvature-Evolutes.pdf
# Ref2-Differential-Geometry.pdf
# Ref3-Iterating-Evolutes-And-Involutes.pdf

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| * Upload the 3 files.

You will find them in the '''Code files '''link of this tutorial.

Resume this tutorial after you complete this assignment.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the File Manager folders and file.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Your''' File manager''' should now have 2 folders, named '''Assignments''' and '''Reference Material'''.

And another file named '''involutes-img1.png'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on cross icon.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Close the pop-up window by clicking on the '''X icon '''at the top right.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next set of formatting options are

'''Underline, Strikethrough, Subscript '''and''' Superscript. '''

'''Align''' and '''indent '''options follow these.

These work as in any other '''text editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''equation editor'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s learn how to use the next option, that is the '''equation editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Show the sentence in the doc file.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I want to add this sentence with an equation in it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''equation editor'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| So I will click on '''equation editor '''icon.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Insert the equation.

[[Image:]]
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then use the '''equation editor''' to type the equation.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Text on screen

Details about how to use '''LaTeX''' to type equations, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Details about how to use '''LaTeX''' to type equations, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save equation'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save equation '''button when you have finished.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Insert character, insert table''' and '''clear formatting''' options, work as in any other '''text editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Undo''' and '''Redo'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next two options are '''Undo''' and '''Redo'''.

These get enabled, only when there is some unsaved text.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 2 options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| After this, we have 2 options for '''accessibility'''.

The first icon is called '''Accessibility checker. '''The 2nd one is '''screen reader helper.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Text on screen:'''

Details about '''accessible websites''' and these options, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the toggle HTML option.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The last option is to toggle from the '''editor view''' to '''HTML code '''view.

This can be used to embed images, videos, PPT, interactive content, etc.

Click on toggle '''HTML''' again. This will bring us back to the normal '''editor view.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Make the word '''Involute''' bold and italicized.

Make the steps as ordered list.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I have formatted the text using the '''bold, italics''' and''' list '''options for this demonstration.

Do likewise for your content.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and display'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| When you finish the formatting, scroll down to the bottom and click on '''Save and display '''button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Demo of logout
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We can now '''logout''' of '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to '''Priya Sinha’s login '''and view the page
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This is how student '''Priya Sinha''' will view this page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| <nowiki><PAUSE></nowiki>

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 7''':

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt about:

* '''Resources '''in '''Moodle'''
* Adding '''course material'''
* '''Formatting''' options in the default '''text editor'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is another assignment for you.

* Add a new folder '''resource''' in '''Basic Calculus'''
* Add the '''reference files''' from the '''File Manager'''
* Refer to the '''Assignment''' link of this tutorial for details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''9:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)

* Do you have questions in THIS '''Spoken Tutorial'''?
* Please visit '''http://forums.spoken-tutorial.org'''
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* Someone from our team will answer them

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 12:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Nancy and Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Formatting-Course-material-in-Moodle/English

2018-12-06T13:19:16Z

Itspriyanka:

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Formatting Course Material'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Formatting course material '''in '''Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* '''Resources '''in '''Moodle'''
* Adding additional '''course material'''
* '''Formatting''' options in the default '''text editor'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This tutorial is recorded using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 ''' and
* '''Firefox '''web browser

You may use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Assumptions

| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This tutorial assumes that

* your '''site administrator''' has set up a '''Moodle website'''
* and registered you as a '''teacher.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Prerequisites
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"|
* Learners of this tutorial should have
** a '''teacher login''' on '''Moodle'''
** at least one '''course '''assigned to them by the '''administrator'''
** some course material uploaded for their respective '''course'''
* If not, please refer to the relevant '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter http://127.0.0.1/moodle/
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser and open your '''Moodle site.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Username: '''becky0808'''

Password: '''Spokentutorial12#'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Login with your '''teacher username''' and '''password''' details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are now in the '''teacher dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to Calculus
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''navigation menu''' on the left, notice '''Calculus''' under '''My Courses'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Calculus course.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the course topics and summaries.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We have already added '''announcements''' and some common '''course''' details earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will now add some additional '''course material. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 5: '''Resources in Moodle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
* All '''course material '''in '''Moodle '''are called '''Resources'''.
* These are '''material '''that a teacher uses to support learning.
* '''Resources''' could be internal like lecture notes, books or external like '''Wikipedia links'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' Add an activity or resource'''

Click on gear icon-> '''Turn Editing On'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s begin.

Click on the gear icon at the top right of the page and then on '''Turn Editing On'''.

Note: you need to turn the '''editing on''' to make any changes to the '''course'''.

Click on '''Add an activity or resource''' link at the bottom right of the '''Basic Calculus section. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Page'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A pop-up opens with a list of '''resources'''.

Scroll down and select '''Page''' from the list.

Read the detailed description about the '''resource''' on the right side when you select any '''resource'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add button'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Add button '''at the bottom of the pop-up screen.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Name''': Lecture 1 Notes
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''Name '''field, I will type '''Lecture 1 Notes'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description''': Involutes and construction of Involute of circle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then in the '''Description '''box, type “'''Involutes and construction of Involute of circle”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Display description on course page'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the option '''Display description on course page'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to see the '''Page Content''' box.

Copy and paste the text from '''Basic Calculus - Involutes.odt '''file.

We will be uploading the image at a later stage.

This file is available in the '''Code Files '''link of this tutorial.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on down-arrow
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us now '''format''' this text.

Click on the down-arrow at the top left of the '''editor''' to expand the '''menu widgets'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select heading text

Click on heading dropdown -> Select '''Heading (medium)'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will make the headings more prominent, as shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the options one by one as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The options in the '''text editor''' are similar to any other standard''' text editor'''.

Here we can see options like '''Bold, Italics, Unordered '''and''' Ordered lists.'''

We also see options to '''hyperlink''' and '''unlink''' a text.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the option.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There’s an option to add an image, as well.

Let us add an image after the text “'''Figure 1 shows the involute of a circle”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Press''' Enter.'''

Click on the''' Image icon.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Press '''Enter '''to make space for the image. Then click on the '''Image icon'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Image properties'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''Image properties '''window appears.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the URL field
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| If you want to insert an '''external image''', you can enter the '''URL '''of the '''image '''here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Browse Repositories'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will click on '''Browse Repositories '''button to upload an '''image'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to File Picker
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A pop-up window opens with the title '''File Picker'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload a file''' -> '''Choose File''' Select '''involutes-img1.png'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload a file'''.

Then click on '''Choose File '''or '''Browse''' button and select the file from your machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This '''image''' is also available in the '''Code Files''' link. You can download and use it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload this file.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload this file''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description''': This is the involute of a circle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will type the description as “'''This is the involute of a circle”'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save image'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Lastly, click on '''Save image''' button to insert the '''image'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Add media icon'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next option is to add '''media'''. This could be a '''URL''','''video''' or '''audio''' file .

Again, this can be an '''external URL''' or can be uploaded from our machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Manage files'''.

Highlight the image already present.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next option is''' Manage Files. '''Let’s click on it.

'''Manage Files''' option is to have a set of files that you want to store and display.

These could include '''assignment submissions, resource files,''' etc.

They can be used by any other '''resource''' in this '''course'''.

Notice that the '''image''' we uploaded just now, is also present here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 3 icons.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 3 '''icons''' on the left of this pop-up box.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on File picker.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| First is the '''File picker'''. Let’s click on it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| It has options to see the '''server files''', '''recent files''', etc.

'''Server files''' are the files which have been used elsewhere in the course and can be reused.

I will close this for now by clicking on the '''X icon.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Create Folder'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next, we will click on '''Create Folder icon''', which is the second '''icon'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''New folder name '''->Assignments
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''New folder name '''field, let’s type '''Assignments'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Assignments''' folder
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on the '''Assignments''' folder to open it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Drag the assignment file.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let me drag my file inside the '''Assignments '''folder.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the uploaded file
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, click on the file that that was just uploaded.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This pop-up has the option to modify the file name and author.

And also to download or delete the file.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Cancel''' button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I don’t wish to change anything.

So I will click on the '''Cancel''' button at the bottom of the pop-up.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 6a: Assignment'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, pause the tutorial and do this small assignment:

* Create a folder '''Reference Material'''.
* Ensure that the folder is inside the '''Files''' folder and not inside the subfolder '''Assignments'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 6b: Assignment'''

'''Upload the 3 reference files:'''
# R1-Curvature Evolutes.pdf
# R2-Differential geometry.pdf
# R3-Iterating Evolutes and Involutes.pdf
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
Upload the 3 files.

You will find them in the '''code files '''link of this tutorial.

Resume this tutorial after you complete this assignment.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the File Manager folders and file.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Your''' File manager''' should now have 2 folders, named '''Assignments''' and '''Reference Material'''.

And another file named '''involutes-img1.png'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on cross icon.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Close the pop-up window by clicking on the '''X icon '''at the top right.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next set of formatting options are

'''Underline, Strikethrough, Subscript '''and''' Superscript. '''

'''Align''' and '''indent '''options follow these.

These work as in any other '''text editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''equation editor'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s learn how to use the next option, that is the '''equation editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Show the sentence in the doc file.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I want to add this sentence with an equation in it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''equation editor'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| So I will click on '''equation editor '''icon.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Insert the equation.

[[Image:]]
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then use the '''equation editor''' to type the equation.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Text on screen

Details about how to use '''LaTeX''' to type equations, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Details about how to use '''LaTeX''' to type equations, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save equation'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save equation '''button when you have finished.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Insert character, insert table''' and '''clear formatting''' options, work as in any other '''text editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Undo''' and '''Redo'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next two options are '''Undo''' and '''Redo'''.

These get enabled, only when there is some unsaved text.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 2 options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| After this, we have 2 options for '''accessibility'''.

The first icon is called '''Accessibility checker. '''The 2nd one is '''screen reader helper.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Text on screen:'''

Details about '''accessible websites''' and these options, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Details about '''accessible websites''' and these options, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the toggle HTML option.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The last option is to toggle from the '''editor view''' to '''HTML code '''view.

This can be used to embed images, videos, PPT, interactive content, etc.

Click on toggle '''HTML''' again. This will bring us back to the normal '''editor view.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Make the word '''Involute''' bold and italicized.

Make the steps as ordered list.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I have formatted the text using the '''bold, italics''' and''' list '''options for this demonstration.

Do likewise for your content.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and display'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| When you finish the formatting, scroll down to the bottom and click on '''Save and display '''button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Demo of logout
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We can now '''logout''' of '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to '''Priya Sinha’s login '''and view the page
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This is how student '''Priya Sinha''' will view this page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| <nowiki><PAUSE></nowiki>

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 7''':

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt about:

* '''Resources '''in '''Moodle'''
* Adding '''course material'''
* '''Formatting''' options in the default '''text editor'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is another assignment for you.

* Add a new folder '''resource''' in '''Basic Calculus'''
* Add the '''reference files''' from the '''File Manager'''
* Refer to '''Assignment''' link of this tutorial for details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''9:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)

* Do you have questions in THIS '''Spoken Tutorial'''?
* Please visit '''http://forums.spoken-tutorial.org'''
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* Someone from our team will answer them
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 12:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Nancy and Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Formatting-Course-material-in-Moodle/English

2018-11-01T06:55:15Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Formatting Course Material'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Formatting course material '''in '''Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* '''Resources '''in '''Moodle'''
* Adding additional '''course material'''
* '''Formatting''' options in the default '''text editor'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This tutorial is recorded using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 '''

And

* '''Firefox '''web browser

You may use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Assumptions

| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This tutorial assumes that

* your '''site administrator''' has set up a '''Moodle website'''
* and registered you as a '''teacher.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Prerequisites
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| * Learners of this tutorial should have
** a '''teacher login''' on '''Moodle'''
** at least one '''course '''assigned to them by the '''administrator'''
** some course material uploaded for their respective '''course'''
* If not, please refer to the relevant '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter http://127.0.0.1/moodle/
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser and open your '''Moodle site.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Username: '''becky0808'''

Password: '''Spokentutorial12#'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Login with your '''teacher username''' and '''password''' details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are now in the '''teacher dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to Calculus
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''navigation menu''' on the left, notice '''Calculus''' under '''My Courses'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Calculus course.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the course topics and summaries.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We have already added '''announcements''' and some common '''course''' details earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will now add some additional '''course material. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 5: '''Resources in Moodle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| * All '''course material '''in '''Moodle '''are called '''Resources'''.
* These are '''material '''that a teacher uses to support learning.
* '''Resources''' could be internal like lecture notes, books or external like '''Wikipedia links'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on''' Add an activity or resource'''

Click on gear icon-> '''Turn Editing On'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s begin.

Click on the gear icon at the top right of the page and then on '''Turn Editing On'''.

Note you need to turn the editing on to make any changes to the course.

Click on '''Add an activity or resource''' link at the bottom right of the '''Basic Calculus section. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Page'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A pop-up opens with a list of '''resources'''.

Scroll down and select '''Page''' from the list.

Read the detailed description about the '''resource''' on the right side when you select any '''resource'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add button'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Add button '''at the bottom of the pop-up screen.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Name''': Lecture 1 Notes
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''Name '''field, I will type '''Lecture 1 Notes'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description''': Involutes and construction of Involute of circle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then in the '''Description '''box, type “'''Involutes and construction of Involute of circle”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Display description on course page'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the option '''Display description on course page'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to see the '''Page Content''' box.

Copy and paste the text from '''Basic Calculus - Involutes.odt '''file.

We will be uploading the image at a later stage.

This file is available in the '''Code Files '''link of this tutorial.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on down-arrow
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us now '''format''' this text.

Click on the down-arrow at the top left of the '''editor''' to expand the '''menu widgets'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select heading text

Click on heading dropdown -> Select '''Heading (medium)'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will make the headings more prominent, as shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the options one by one as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The options in the '''text editor''' are similar to any other standard''' text editor'''.

Here we can see options like '''Bold, Italics, Unordered '''and''' Ordered lists.'''

We also see options to '''hyperlink''' and '''unlink''' a text.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the option.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There’s an option to add an image, as well.

Let us add an image after the text “'''Figure 1 shows the involute of a circle”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Press''' Enter.'''

Click on the''' Image icon.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Press '''Enter '''to make space for the image. Then click on the '''Image icon'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Image properties'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''Image properties '''window appears.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the URL field
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| If you want to insert an '''external image''', you can enter the '''URL '''of the '''image '''here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Browse Repositories'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will click on '''Browse Repositories '''button to upload an '''image'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to File Picker
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A pop-up window opens with the title '''File Picker'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload a file''' -> '''Choose File''' Select '''involutes-img1.png'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload a file'''.

Then click on '''Choose File '''or '''Browse''' button and select the file from your machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This '''image''' is also available in the '''Code Files''' link. You can download and use it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload this file.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Upload this file''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description''': This is the involute of a circle
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will type the description as “'''This is the involute of a circle”'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save image'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Lastly, click on '''Save image''' button to insert the '''image'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Add media icon'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next option is to add '''media'''. This could be a''' URL, video''' or '''audio''' file.

Again, this can be an '''external URL''' or can be uploaded from our machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Manage files'''.

Highlight the image already present.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next option is''' Manage Files. '''Let’s click on it.

'''Manage Files''' option is to have a set of files that you want to store and display.

These could include '''assignment submissions, resource files,''' etc.

They can be used by any other '''resource''' in this '''course'''.

Notice that the '''image''' we uploaded just now, is also present here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 3 icons.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 3 '''icons''' on the left of this pop-up box.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on File picker.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| First is the '''File picker'''. Let’s click on it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight as per narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| It has options to see the '''server files''', '''recent files''', etc.

'''Server files''' are the files which have been used elsewhere in the course and can be reused.

I will close this for now by clicking on the '''X icon.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Create Folder'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next, we will click on '''Create Folder icon''', which is the second '''icon'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''New folder name '''->Assignments
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''New folder name '''field, let’s type '''Assignments'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Assignments''' folder
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on the '''Assignments''' folder to open it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Drag the assignment file.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let me drag my file inside the '''Assignments '''folder.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the uploaded file
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, click on the file that that was just uploaded.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This pop-up has the option to modify the file name and author.

And also to download or delete the file.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Cancel''' button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I don’t wish to change anything.

So I will click on the '''Cancel''' button at the bottom of the pop-up.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 6a: Assignment'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, pause the tutorial and do this small assignment:

* Create a folder '''Reference Material'''.
* Ensure that the folder is inside the '''Files''' folder and not inside the subfolder '''Assignments'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Slide 6b: Assignment'''

'''Upload the 3 reference files:'''

# R1-Curvature Evolutes.pdf
# R2-Differential geometry.pdf
# R3-Iterating Evolutes and Involutes.pdf

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| * Upload the 3 files.

You will find them in the '''code files '''link of this tutorial.

Resume this tutorial after you complete this assignment.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the File Manager folders and file.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Your''' File manager''' should now have 2 folders, named '''Assignments''' and '''Reference Material'''.

And another file named '''involutes-img1.png'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on cross icon.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Close the pop-up window by clicking on the '''X icon '''at the top right.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next set of formatting options are

'''Underline, Strikethrough, Subscript '''and''' Superscript. '''

'''Align''' and '''indent '''options follow these.

These work as in any other '''text editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''equation editor'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s learn how to use the next option, that is the '''equation editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Show the sentence in the doc file.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I want to add this sentence with an equation in it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''equation editor'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| So I will click on '''equation editor '''icon.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Insert the equation.

[[Image:]]
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then use the '''equation editor''' to type the equation.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Text on screen

Details about how to use '''LaTeX''' to type equations, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Details about how to use '''LaTeX''' to type equations, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save equation'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save equation '''button when you have finished.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Insert character, insert table''' and '''clear formatting''' options, work as in any other '''text editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Undo''' and '''Redo'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next two options are '''Undo''' and '''Redo'''.

These get enabled, only when there is some unsaved text.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 2 options as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| After this, we have 2 options for '''accessibility'''.

The first icon is called '''Accessibility checker. '''The 2nd one is '''screen reader helper.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Text on screen:'''

Details about '''accessible websites''' and these options, are in '''Additional Reading Material''' link.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the toggle HTML option.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The last option is to toggle from the '''editor view''' to '''HTML code '''view.

This can be used to embed images, videos, PPT, interactive content, etc.

Click on toggle '''HTML''' again. This will bring us back to the normal '''editor view.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Make the word '''Involute''' bold and italicized.

Make the steps as ordered list.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I have formatted the text using the '''bold, italics''' and''' list '''options for this demonstration.

Do likewise for your content.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and display'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| When you finish the formatting, scroll down to the bottom and click on '''Save and display '''button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Demo of logout
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We can now '''logout''' of '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to '''Priya Sinha’s login '''and view the page
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This is how student '''Priya Sinha''' will view this page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| <nowiki><PAUSE></nowiki>

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 7''':

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt about:

* '''Resources '''in '''Moodle'''
* Adding '''course material'''
* '''Formatting''' options in the default '''text editor'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is another assignment for you.

* Add a new folder '''resource''' in '''Basic Calculus'''
* Add the '''reference files''' from the '''File Manager'''
* Refer to '''assignment code''' file of this tutorial for details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''9:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)

* Do you have questions in THIS '''Spoken Tutorial'''?
* Please visit '''http://forums.spoken-tutorial.org'''
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* Someone from our team will answer them

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 12:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Nancy and Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Course-Administration-in-Moodle/English

2018-10-29T05:20:33Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Course Administration '''in '''Moodle'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Course Administration '''in '''Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* '''Course Administration '''in '''Moodle'''
* '''Activities''' and '''Resources''' in a '''course'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This tutorial is recorded using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 '''

and

* And '''Firefox '''web browser

You may use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #ead1dc;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Assumptions

| style="border:1pt solid #ead1dc;padding:0.106cm;"| This tutorial assumes that

* your '''site administrator''' has set up a '''Moodle website'''
* and registered you as a '''teacher.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Prerequisites
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| * Learners of this tutorial should have
** a '''teacher login''' on '''Moodle'''
** at least one '''course '''assigned to them by the '''administrator'''
** some course material uploaded for their respective '''course'''
* If not, please refer to the relevant '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter http://127.0.0.1/moodle/
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser and open your '''moodle site.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Username: '''becky0808'''

Password: '''Spokentutorial12#'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Login with your '''teacher username''' and '''password''' details.

I am already logged in as '''teacher Rebecca Raymond'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are in the '''teacher’s dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to Calculus
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''navigation menu''' on the left, notice '''Calculus''' under '''My Courses'''.

Please note.

All the '''courses''' for which you are enrolled as a '''teacher''' or '''student''' will be listed here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Calculus course.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the course topics and summaries.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We updated the '''course topics''' and '''summaries''' in the preceding tutorials.

If you didn’t do so, please refer to the assignments of the preceding tutorials.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will now learn about some useful '''course '''settings.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''gear icon''' at the top right of the '''section'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Edit Settings. '''

Click on '''Expand All'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Edit Settings'''.

Then click on '''Expand All''' at the right, to expand all the '''sections'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The settings seen here, were defined by the '''administrator''', when this '''course '''was created.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Calculus '''on top of the page.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''General section, '''we have '''Course full name.'''

This is the name displayed at the top of the '''course page'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Calculus''' in the navigation menu on the left.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course short name '''is the name displayed in the '''course navigation '''and in '''course-'''related '''emails'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Course category'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course category '''is already set by the '''admin'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course start date''': 10 Aug 2018

'''Course end date''': 10 Nov 2018

Leave '''Course ID number'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We can change '''Course start date, Course end date '''and '''Course ID number''', as per our requirements.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description''': Topics covered in this Calculus course are:

* Basic Calculus
* Intermediate Calculus
* Sequences and series
* Multivariable Calculus
* Matrices

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Under '''Description section''', see the '''Course Summary '''textbox.

I will delete the existing content and type the following.

My students will see this on the front page of my '''course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Course summary files'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next comes the field '''Course summary files.'''

These''' '''are the files that will be displayed to the students, along with the '''Course summary. '''

By default, only '''jpg, gif''' and '''png file types''' are allowed as '''Course summary '''files.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Drag a file into the box

Point to the Upload icon

Point to the download arrow
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 3 ways to upload a file:

# Drag and drop the file in the box.
# Click on the '''Upload''' or '''Add '''icon at the top left.
# Click on the downward arrow.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point '''File picker'''

Click on '''Upload a file '''option
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| If you click on '''Upload '''or '''Add '''icon or on the downward arrow, the '''File picker''' dialog box opens.

Click on '''Upload a file '''option on the left menu.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Browse '''button >> select a file >>select''' calculus.jpg'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Browse '''or '''Choose File''' button.

Then select the desired file from your machine.

I will select''' calculus.jpg''' from my system.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the '''Save as '''field
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You can give it a different name by typing it in the '''Save as '''field.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Author '''and '''Choose license '''fields
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Specify the '''author''' and '''license''' details in the respective fields.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Upload this file '''button but don’t click
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Lastly, click on '''Upload this file '''button at the bottom.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| So that’s how we can upload '''Course summary '''files.

Next comes '''Course format'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Course format '''dropdown
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course format''' refers to the way '''resources''' and '''activities''' are organized for the students.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the 4 options as per narration.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 4 options in '''Format''' dropdown -

* '''Single Activity Format'''
* '''Social Format'''
* '''Topics Format '''and
* '''Weekly Format'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Topics''' '''format'''.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Our '''admin''' has selected '''Topics format'''.

We will let it remain as it is.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Hidden sections''' dropdown.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next setting is for '''Hidden sections'''.

These are basically '''topics '''in a '''course '''that can be kept hidden from students.

This can be useful when there is a certain topic, which is not yet completed by the teacher.

This setting determines how to present the '''Hidden sections''' to students.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Hidden sections are shown in collapsed form'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Choosing this option will display the content in collapsed form to the students.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then select '''Hidden sections are completely invisible'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Choosing this option will hide the content from the students.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Hidden sections are shown in collapsed form'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will let it remain as default, for now.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Course Layout.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The next drop-down is '''Course Layout'''. Click on it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Show all sections in one page'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We can choose to show all '''sections''' in one page, by selecting this option.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''show one section per page'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Another option here is '''Show one section per page'''.

This will split the '''course '''over several pages, depending on the number of '''sections'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Show all sections in one page'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will let it remain on '''Show all sections in one page, '''for now.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Appearance '''section
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next is the '''Appearance''' section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show gradebook to students '''-> Yes
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice the '''Show gradebook to students''' option.

Many activities in the '''course '''allow teachers to assign grades.

This option determines whether a student can see those grades.

This option is set to '''Yes,''' by default. We will let it remain as is.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show activity reports '''-> Yes
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will change '''Show activity reports''' as '''Yes,''' if not already selected by default.

This ensures that a student can see his/her '''activity reports '''from his/her '''profile page.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Maximum upload size '''field
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We can set the maximum size of the files that can be uploaded for this '''course'''.

Files can be uploaded for '''additional materials, assignments, '''etc.

Our '''admin '''has set this to '''128MB''', which is the maximum file size.

Let us keep the size as it is.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will let all the other settings remain at their default values.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and display'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and click on the '''Save and display '''button.

We are brought to the '''Course '''page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Announcements'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice the '''Announcements''' link above the topic names.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This will let the students know about mandatory information, latest news, announcements, etc.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon.

Click on '''Turn Editing On'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''gear''' icon at the top right of the page and then on '''Turn Editing On'''.

'''NOTE''': You need to turn the editing on, to make any changes to the '''course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on Edit -> Edit settings
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, to the right of '''Announcements''',

click on '''Edit''' and then '''Edit Settings.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description: '''Please check the announcements regularly.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| And in '''Description''' I will type the following text.

'''“Please check the announcements regularly”.'''

Check '''Display description on course page. '''This will display the description just below the link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Leave all other settings as they are.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and return'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and click on the button '''Save and return to course.'''

We''' '''come back to the '''Course '''page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Announcements'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| To add more announcements, click on the '''Announcements''' title.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click '''Add a new topic'''

'''Subject: '''Minimum Requirements

'''Message:''' This course requires you to submit a minimum of 3 assignments and attempt 5 quizzes to pass.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now click on '''Add a new topic''' button.

Type the '''Subject''' as '''Minimum requirements'''.

Type the message as

'''“This course requires you to submit a minimum of 3 assignments and attempt 5 quizzes to pass”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Discussion subscription'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice that the checkbox '''Discussion subscription''' is checked and is non-editable.

This is because everyone enrolled in the '''course''' is compulsorily subscribed to it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Attachments'''

Check '''Pinned '''checkbox
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Next is '''Attachments'''. You can either drag and drop or upload related files here.

If you want the announcements to show up at the top of the '''forum''', click on '''Pinned''' checkbox.

I will tick it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Send forum post notifications with no editing-time delay'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Tick the next checkbox, as well.

This will send a '''notification''' to everyone '''subscribed''' to this '''forum''' immediately.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Expand '''Display period'''

Click on '''Post to forum'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Expand the next section''' Display period.'''

The settings here determine if this '''forum post '''should be visible for a date range.

By default, these are disabled. It means the '''posts''' will always be visible.

We will let the default settings remain.

Scroll down and click '''Post to forum''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the message
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A success message is displayed.

'''Post authors''' have 30 min to make any changes to the '''posts'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let me click on '''Calculus''' link in the '''breadcrumb'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let me now add a page with detailed syllabus to this '''section'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add an activity or resource'''

Select '''Page'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add an activity or resource''' link at the bottom right of the '''General section.'''

From the list of '''Resources''', choose '''Page'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Read the description of this activity that will appear when you make the choice.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on the '''Add''' button at the bottom.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are brought to a new page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Name''': Detailed syllabus
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''Name '''field, type '''Detailed syllabus'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Description '''textbox
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will leave the '''Description '''textbox blank because the title is self-explanatory.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Page Content:'''

Detailed contents:

Topic 1: Basic Calculus: (6 lectures)

Evolutes and involutes; Evaluation of definite and improper integrals; Beta and Gamma functions and their properties; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate surface areas and volumes of revolutions.

Topic 2: Intermediate Calculus: (6 lectures)

Rolle’s Theorem, Mean value theorems, Taylor’s and Maclaurin theorems with remainders; indeterminate forms and L'Hospital's rule; Maxima and minima.

Topic 3: Sequences and series: (10 lectures)

Convergence of sequence and series, tests for convergence; Power series, Taylor's series, series for exponential, trigonometric and logarithm functions; Fourier series: Half range sine and cosine series, Parseval’s theorem.

Topic 4: Multivariable Calculus (Differentiation): (8 lectures)

Limit, continuity and partial derivatives, directional derivatives, total derivative; Tangent plane and normal line; Maxima, minima and saddle points; Method of Lagrange multipliers; Gradient, curl and divergence.

Topic 5: Matrices (10 lectures)

Inverse and rank of a matrix, rank-nullity theorem; System of linear equations; Symmetric, skew-symmetric and orthogonal matrices; Determinants; Eigenvalues and eigenvectors; Diagonalization of matrices; Cayley-Hamilton Theorem, and Orthogonal transformation.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will enter the detailed syllabus of this '''Calculus''' course in the '''Page Content''' textbox.

This content is available in the '''Code Files '''link of this tutorial.

You can download and make use of it while practising.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and return to course'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and click on '''Save and return to course''' button.

We come back to the '''course '''page again.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on user icon >> choose '''Log out '''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will now '''logout''' of our account.

To do so, click on the '''user icon''' at the top right.

Now choose '''Log out''' option.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Only narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let me show you how this page will look like to a student.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Text on screen

Student: Priya Sinha
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I have a '''student ID Priya Sinha '''with me.

This student has also been enrolled in the '''Calculus''' course by the '''admin'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to user icon
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I’ve logged in as student '''Priya Sinha'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now I will click on '''Calculus''' on the left.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the top right
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This is how a student will view this page.

Notice that there is no '''gear icon''' at the top right of this page.

This is because students cannot edit any part of the '''course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''user icon '''at the top right and then on '''Log out '''option.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will now log out of the '''student id.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| <nowiki><PAUSE></nowiki>

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 7''':

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt about:

* '''Course Administration '''in '''Moodle'''
* '''Activities''' and '''Resources''' in a '''course'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is a small assignment for you.

* Add a new '''Page''' resource detailing the '''course '''outcome.
* Refer to the assignment code file of this tutorial for details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''9:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)

* Do you have questions in THIS '''Spoken Tutorial'''?
* Please visit '''http://forums.spoken-tutorial.org'''
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* Someone from our team will answer them

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 12:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Nancy and Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Teachers-Dashboard-in-Moodle/English

2018-10-23T11:31:23Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

Teacher’s dashboard in '''Moodle'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Teacher’s dashboard '''in''' Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

* '''Moodle''' course overview
* The '''teachers’ dashboard '''
* How to edit''' profile '''
* How to edit '''preferences'''
* How to add some preliminary details pertaining to our '''course '''on '''Moodle.'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn about a typical '''Moodle course''' overview.

Then we will learn about:

* The '''teachers’ dashboard '''
* How to edit''' profile '''and
* How to edit '''preferences'''

Lastly, we will learn to add some preliminary details pertaining to our '''course '''on '''Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| To record this tutorial I am using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 '''

and

* '''Firefox '''web browser

You may use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Assumptions

| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This tutorial assumes that

* your '''site administrator''' has set up a '''Moodle website'''
* and assigned you to a new, blank '''course''' where you have '''teacher privileges. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide:'''

'''Moodle-block-diagram.pdf'''
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| My '''system administrator '''has already done the following.

'''Please note:'''

'''Teacher role '''has been assigned to''' user “Rebecca Raymond” '''for the''' course “Calculus”.'''

|-
| style="border-top:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-bottom:1pt solid #000000;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Prerequisites
| style="border-top:1pt solid #000000;border-bottom:1pt solid #ead1dc;border-left:1pt solid #000000;border-right:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Ask your '''site administrator '''to refer to the '''Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

And create a '''user '''for you, who has '''teacher privileges '''for at least one '''course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 6:'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Moodle '''is one of the most flexible, creative and easy-to-use teaching and learning system.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Block Diagram'''

Uses of Moodle for a teacher.pdf
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Typically, '''Moodle''' can be used by teachers to -

* Upload their teaching-learning resources
* Manage their collection of multimedia e-resources like files, videos, etc.
* Share web resources and open educational resources
* Embed YouTube / Vimeo videos
* Administer quizzes and assignments
* Encourage the use of collaborative content like Wiki, Glossary, etc.
* Interact and communicate with students synchronously and asynchronously &
* Track students' learning progress

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Block Diagram'''

Courseflow-Calculus.pdf
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I have with me the course overview of my '''Calculus course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Same slide continues
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I have

# The '''topics''' that will be covered
# Number of '''lectures''' per week
# Total number of '''assignments''' for the course
# Total number of '''quizzes''' (weekly or fortnightly)
# Total number of '''end of course exams'''
# Marks distribution
# Course materials
# Book references

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Only narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I have to structure my '''course '''and upload all the materials accordingly on '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter http://127.0.0.1/moodle/
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser and open the '''Moodle site.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the header and the courses
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A page with a header and available '''courses '''will be displayed.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Log in'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Login''' link at the top right corner of the window.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type username = '''becky0808 '''and password = '''Spokentutorial1@'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I will login as '''teacher Rebecca Raymond. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Change password page
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We are on a page that prompts us to change our '''password'''.

This is because the '''Force password change '''option was activated by the '''admin '''earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| New password -> Type current password >> new password '''Spokentutorial12#'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type the current '''password '''followed by the new '''password'''.

I will type '''Spokentutorial12 #'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| New password (again) -> Re-type new password >> Click on '''Save changes '''button
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Re-type the new '''password.'''

And then click on '''Save changes '''button at the bottom.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the success message in a red box
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| A success message appears confirming that the '''password''' has been changed.

Click on the '''Continue''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The page that we are in now, is called the '''dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the 3 columns
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Our '''dashboard''' is divided into 3 '''columns'''.

The one on the left is the '''Navigation''' menu.

The wider one in the middle, is the main '''Course overview '''area with ''''Timeline'''' and ''''Courses'''' tabs.

The one on the right is the '''Blocks column'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Courses '''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Courses tab''' lists the courses you are enrolled in.

Click on the '''Courses''' tab in the '''Course overview '''area.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''In Progress '''tab, we see 2 '''courses''' here: '''Calculus''' and '''Linear Algebra.'''

These are the '''courses''' assigned to '''teacher Rebecca Raymond '''by the '''admin'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Future''' tab.

Click on '''Past''' tab.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Future '''courses '''assigned to her, will be visible in the '''Future''' tab.

Likewise, any of her '''courses''' that are over, will be seen under the '''Past '''tab.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| On the top left corner >> point to '''Navigation menu.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us now look at the '''header''' of the '''page'''.

On the top left corner, we can see '''Navigation Drawer '''or''' Navigation menu.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to Calendar and Administration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This gives access to the '''Calendar, Private Files '''and''' My courses '''links.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the menu bar to collapse it.

Toggle it to open it.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This is a '''toggle menu.'''

Which means it changes its '''status '''from '''open '''to '''close '''and vice-versa, when clicked.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the notification and messages icons.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| At the top right, there are quick access icons for '''notifications''' and '''messages'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Rebecca Raymond’s '''user menu.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Clicking on the '''profile picture''' at the top right, will enable us to access the '''user menu'''.

It is also called as the '''quick access user menu'''.

Click on it.

All these '''menu items''' are also''' toggle menus''', similar to the one on the left.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Profile''' link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Profile''' option.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight various sections of the '''Profile''' page.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Every user in '''Moodle''' has a '''profile page'''. It has links to

* allow '''users''' to edit their '''profile''' information
* see the '''courses''' they are enrolled in
* view their '''blog '''or '''forum''' '''posts'''
* check any '''reports''' they have access to and
* view their '''access logs''' that was used to login the last time

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Edit Profile '''link.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now let’s click on the '''Edit Profile''' link

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to show the various sections.

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''Edit Profile page''' opens up.

This page is divided into 5 sections:

* '''General'''
* '''User Picture'''
* '''Additional Names'''
* '''Interests'''
* '''Optional'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''General '''and '''User picture''' sections are expanded, by default.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Expand all '''and '''Collapse all '''links
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''‘Expand all’ '''link on the right, expands all the '''sections'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on any one section
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| And clicking on any '''section''' name either expands or collapses it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| All '''fields '''here are editable.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| First Name: Rebecca

Surname: Raymond

Email address: rebecca@maths.iitb.ac.in

City: Mumbai

Country: India

Email display: Allow only other course members to see my email address

Email activated: This email is enabled

Email format: Pretty HTML

……..All options as default
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You can enter your personal details in '''General section''', as I have done now.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Description:'''

First Name: Prof. Rebecca Raymond

Building: Mathematics Department Annex

Phone: 25761234

Email: rebecca@maths.iitb.ac.in

Website: http://www.aero.iitb.ac.in/~rebecca/

Specialization: Numerical Analysis, Finite Element Methods

Background

IIT Bombay (2001 - present), XYZ Bangalore (1997 - 2001), Vantage Haifa (1995 - 1997)

R&D Areas/Projects:

Vector Calculus & Linear Algebra, Problems in Elliptic Partial Differential Equations

Courses Taught:

Modern Theory of partial differential equations

Linear Algebra

Calculus
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| As a '''teacher''', I’d like my students to know a little bit about me.

So, here in the '''Description''' field, I will fill out some details.

Pause the tutorial and fill out your details as I have done here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the other fields and sections

Point to '''Profile picture'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| You can also add some information in the other fields and sections.

You can upload your picture as well.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''City/Town: '''Mumbai

Select '''India''' in the '''Select a Country''' dropdown.

'''Timezone: '''Asia/ Kolkata

<nowiki>------------------------------------------------------------</nowiki>

Scroll down to the '''Optional Section''' that has instant messaging details.

Institution: IIT Bombay

Department: Mathematics

Phone number: 9876543210
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| I have added a few more details in '''General''' and '''Optional''' sections.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Update Profile'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on '''Update Profile '''button and save the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on quick access menu.

Click on '''Preferences'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now click on the '''quick access user menu''' at the top right again.

And click on the '''Preferences''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''Preferences''' page gives '''users '''quick access to various settings they may wish to edit.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 3 sections.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Preferences''' page for a '''teacher’s account '''is divided into :

* '''User account'''
* '''Blogs '''and
* '''Badges '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to show the '''User account '''section.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We have already seen '''Edit Profile''' and '''Change Password''' earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| There are some other '''preferences '''for '''Language, Forum, Editor, Course, Calendar, Message, Notification'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calendar Preferences'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s click on the '''Calendar preferences'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''24-hour''' from the '''Time display format '''dropdown.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will set the '''calendar''' to display time in 24 hour format.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''2 weeks '''from the '''Upcoming events look-ahead''' dropdown.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Also, we will set the '''Upcoming events look-ahead''' to 2 weeks.

This means we’ll see notifications for all events happening in the next 2 weeks, on the calendar.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save Changes '''button.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Save Changes '''button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will go through the rest of the '''preferences''' when we discuss those features later in this series.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the breadcrumbs
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice the information here.

This is the '''breadcrumb navigation.'''

It’s a visual aid that indicates which page we are on, within the '''Moodle site’s''' hierarchy.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point first to '''Dashboard'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| It helps us to go back to a higher-level page with a single click.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Dashboard'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Dashboard '''link in the '''breadcrumbs''' to go to the '''dashboard.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now let us see how to add a topic and brief summary for the '''Calculus''' course.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s click on the '''Calculus course '''in the''' Navigation menu '''at the left.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''gear''' icon at top-right
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| On the new page, click on the '''gear '''icon at the top right.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Turn editing on'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on '''Turn editing on '''option.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| The page now displays more edit options.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on pencil next to '''Topic 1'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the pencil icon next to '''Topic 1'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Type '''Basic Calculus >> '''Press Enter
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, in the text box that appears, type '''Basic Calculus'''.

Press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the topic name
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice the change of topic name.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Edit'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Now click on the '''Edit''' link at the extreme right of that topic.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Edit topic'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| And then click on '''Edit topic '''option.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Summary'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This brings us to the '''Summary''' page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Summary field:'''

Following sub-topics will be covered in this topic:

Evolutes and involutes; Evaluation of definite and improper integrals; Beta and Gamma functions and their properties; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate surface areas and volumes of revolutions.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Here, in the '''Summary''' field, we can give a brief summary of the topic.

I will type as shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''Save Changes'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and click on the '''Save Changes '''button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Observe the change.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Only narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| This is how we begin to add details of our '''course '''in '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on user icon >> choose Log out
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| We will now logout of '''Moodle'''.

To do so, click on the '''user icon '''at the top right.

Now choose '''Log out '''option.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| Only narration.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| <nowiki><PAUSE></nowiki>

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 6''':

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt about:

* Course overview details
* The '''teachers’ dashboard '''
* '''Edit profile '''settings''' '''and
* '''Preferences '''settings and
* Adding preliminary details of the '''course '''in '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Assignment'''

Change all other topic names and add summaries.
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.106cm;"| As an assignment,

* Change the names of all topics in

'''Calculus course'''

* Add respective '''summaries''' to all

topics

* Refer to '''assignment-code''' file of this tutorial for details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''8:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 9:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)

* Do you have questions in THIS '''Spoken Tutorial'''?
* Please visit '''http://forums.spoken-tutorial.org'''
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* Someone from our team will answer them

| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000000;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Nancy and Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the Spoken Tutorial team signing off.

Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle Learning Management System

2018-04-04T10:43:14Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with "'''Moodle''' is a learning management system ('''LMS''' in short) which helps teachers and educators create an online platform for more adaptive and customized learning. Devel..."

'''Moodle''' is a learning management system ('''LMS''' in short) which helps teachers and educators create an online platform for more adaptive and customized learning. Developed in 2002, it is free and open source software for use and is being used by many small and large institutions to create and deliver courses online to their students.

'''Moodle''' has many built-in features ranging from the basics such as file upload, assignments, quizzes, notifications and advanced features such as forums, quiz, wikis etc that can be used by learners. It also has many easy-to-install plugins such as attendance, reminders, analytics etc. to supplement these features.

The Spoken Tutorial Effort for '''Moodle''' Basic level has been contributed by '''Priyanka''' from Hyderabad supported with domain reviews by '''Dr. Indira Koneru''',also from Hyderabad.

__TOC__

==Basic Level: For Administrators==

1. ''' Getting ready for Moodle'''

* Prerequisies for installing Moodle
* Check for packages on localhost
* Database setup

2. ''' Installing Moodle on localhost'''

* Download Moodle
* Install Moodle

3. ''' Admin’s dashboard '''

* Various blocks on the admin’s dashboard
* Admin’s profile page
* How to edit preferences

4. ''' Blocks in Moodle '''

* Add and delete blocks
* Set the front page

5. '''Categories in Moodle '''

* Course Category
* How to create categories & subcategories
* How to perform actions on categories

6. '''Courses in Moodle '''

* How to create a course
* How to perform actions on courses.

7. '''Users and Roles in Moodle '''

* Add a user
* Edit a user’s profile
* Upload users in bulk
* Assign admin role to a user
* Assign a teacher to a course
* Enrol a student in a course

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Categories-in-Moodle/English

2017-10-23T10:30:51Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with " {| style="border-spacing:0;" | style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue''''' | style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Nar..."

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Courses-in-Moodle/English

2017-10-23T09:53:29Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Courses in Moodle'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Courses in Moodle.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn:

* How to create a '''course '''and
* How to perform actions on '''courses.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To record this tutorial, I will be using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3'''
* And '''Firefox '''web browser

You can use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Prerequisites
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| * Learners of this tutorial should know how to create '''categories''' in '''Moodle'''.
* If not, please refer to the relevant''' Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter http://127.0.0.1/moodle/
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser and open your '''Moodle''' homepage.

Make sure that '''XAMPP service''' is running.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Login
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Login with your '''admin username''' and '''password''' details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We are now in the '''admin dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the drawer menu.

Click on '''Site Administration'''.

Click on '''Courses''' -> '''Manage courses and categories'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the drawer menu to open the navigation menu on the left.

On the left side, click on '''Site Administration'''.

Click on the '''Courses''' tab and then on '''Manage courses and categories'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Mathematics'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Note that we have only one '''category '''here, which is '''Mathematics.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the 2 subcategories.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| And two '''subcategories: 1st Year Maths '''and '''2nd Year Maths, '''which we created earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Now, let us create a new '''course''' under '''Mathematics'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Create new course'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| So click on '''Create new course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Expand All'''

Course full name -> '''Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| And in the '''Add a new course''' screen, click on '''Expand All '''at the top right, in order to view all the fields.

In the '''Course full name''' textbox, we will type '''Calculus.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Course short name ->''' Calculus'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| In '''Course short name''', we will again type '''Calculus'''.

'''Course short name''' will be used in the '''breadcrumbs''' and '''course''' related emails.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| This can also be different from the '''course full name'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to course category
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course Category''' is '''Mathematics,''' as we can see.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to Course Visibility

Visible: '''Show'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Next option is''' Course visibility. '''By default, '''Show''' is selected'''.'''

The '''Visible''' setting determines whether the '''course''' will be shown along with other '''courses,''' or not.

A hidden '''course''' is visible only to those assigned to the '''course''', like-

* '''Admin'''
* '''Course creator'''
* '''Teacher'''
* '''Manager'''

We will leave this setting as it is, for now.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Course Start date'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Next comes the '''Course start date'''.

If the '''course''' begins on a particular date like semester start date, select that in the '''start date'''.

This means the '''course''' will not be visible to the students till the '''start date'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Course end date'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course end date,''' by default, is enabled and set to the same date that the course is created.

Let me disable it by clicking on the checkbox.

This would mean that the '''course''' will never end.

However, if there is an end date for the '''course''', you can enable the checkbox here.

Then select the date as per your requirement.

Important note: The '''course''' will not be visible to the students after the selected '''end date'''.

I will leave it disabled.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Course ID Number'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course ID number '''is similar to '''Category ID number'''.

'''Course ID number '''is an optional field.

This is for '''admin users''' to identify the '''course '''with offline '''courses'''.

If your college uses '''IDs''' for '''courses''', then you can use that '''course ID '''here.

This field is not visible to other '''Moodle users'''.

This field is optional and is not displayed anywhere on the website.

I am going to leave this as blank.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Course Summary''' and '''Course''' '''Summary files'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Next under '''Description''' we can see 2 fields: '''Course Summary''' and '''Course''' '''Summary files'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Course Summary'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course summary''' is an optional but important field.

That is because the '''course summary''' text is also scanned when a '''user''' performs a search.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Topics covered in this Calculus course are:'''

* '''Limits'''
* '''Graph of a function'''
* '''Factorial'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Listing topic names is a good idea here.

Type the following:

'''Topics covered in this Calculus course are:'''

* '''Limits'''
* '''Graph of a function'''
* '''Factorial'''

'''Course summary '''is also displayed along with the list of '''courses'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to Course summary files.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Course summary files must be uploaded in '''Course summary files''' field.

By default, only '''jpg, gif''' and '''png file types''' are allowed as '''course summary files.'''

I will skip this as I do not wish to upload any file.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Course format '''dropdown
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Course format''' refers to the way resources and activities are organized for students.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the 4 options as per narration.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| There are 4 options in the '''Format''' dropdown -

* '''Single Activity Format'''
* '''Social Format'''
* '''Topics Format '''And
* '''Weekly Format'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Weekly''' '''format'''.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| There are '''courses''' that run week by week.

If your '''course''' is like that, then select '''Weekly''' '''format'''.

'''Moodle''' will create a section for each week of the '''course, '''with a clear start date and an end date.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Topics''' '''format'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| There are '''courses''' that run topic wise.

If your '''course''' is like that, then select '''Topics''' '''format'''.

'''Moodle''' will create a section for each '''topic''' of the '''course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Topics''' '''format'''.

Select '''5''' in '''Number of sections'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| The default for this field is '''Topics format'''.

We will let it remain as it is.

The number of sections, by default, is 4.

If you have your '''course''' divided in more, or less than 4 topics, change this field as required.

I will make this number as 5.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We will discuss the other '''formats''' in later tutorials.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and display'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let’s leave the rest of the options, as they are.

Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click on the '''Save and display '''button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We are redirected to the '''Enrolled Users''' page.

We will learn about '''user enrollment '''in a later tutorial.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Calculus '''under '''Mathematics'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| For now, we have successfully created our first '''course Calculus '''under the '''category Mathematics'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the navigation menu
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| While we are on this '''course page''', notice that the menu on the left has changed.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Participants''', '''Grades'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| The navigation menu on the left has menus related to the '''course''' we created.

These include '''Participants''', '''Grades''' etc.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Calculus''' on the left.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the course name '''Calculus''' on the left.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''Topic 1, Topic 2''' etc
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We can see that 5 topics are visible here. They are named '''Topic 1, Topic 2''' and so on...

Recall we had given this number 5 earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on gear icon at the top right
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon at the top right of the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Edit settings'''.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Then click on '''Edit settings'''.

This will open a page similar to the page we were on, when we created this '''course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Change '''Course start date''' to 15th October 2017.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We can make changes to the previous settings on this page.

I will change the '''Course start date''' to 15th October 2017.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and display''' button.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click on the '''Save and display''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We will explore the other '''submenus''' under the gear menu later.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us now change the structure of our '''course''' a little bit.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Site Administration -> Courses -> Manage courses and categories'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Site administration'''.

Click on '''Courses''' and then '''Manage courses and categories'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Mathematics'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Mathematics category''' to see the '''course''' we created.

Notice 3 icons on the right of the '''course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Hover over the icons
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Hover over the icons to see what they are.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Hover over the gear icon.

Hover over the trash icon.

Hover over the eye icon.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| The gear icon is for editing a '''course.'''

The delete or '''trash''' icon is for deleting a '''course'''.

And the eye icon is for hiding a '''course'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the eye icon - once to close and once to open
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| A hidden '''course''' will have the eye crossed to indicate the same.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We can click on the gear icon to the right of the course name, to edit the '''course settings'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Add '''Binomials '''at the end of the '''Course Summary'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| I want to modify the '''Course Summary''' and add '''Binomials''' to the existing topics.

Rest of the settings can remain the same.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save and return'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to the bottom of the page and this time click on the '''Save and return''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is a small assignment for you:

* Create a new course '''Linear Algebra '''under the '''category Mathematics'''.
* Hide this '''course''' for now.
* Mention the following topics in '''course summary: Linear equations, Matrices '''and''' Vectors'''.
* Click on '''Save and Return '''button.

Pause the tutorial and continue when done with the assignment.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the down and up arrow icons.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We now have 2 '''courses''' under '''Mathematics''': '''Calculus''' and '''Linear Algebra'''.

Notice that a new icon has appeared next to the '''courses''' now.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the up and down arrows
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| The up and down arrows are to re-arrange the order of the '''courses'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Drag and drop as per narration
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We can also change the order using the drag and drop feature.

Let us move the '''Calculus course''' above the '''Linear Algebra course.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Both these '''courses''' are for 1st year students.

So, let us move them under the''' 1st Year Maths subcategory.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the checkboxes next to '''Calculus '''and''' Linear Algebra'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Check the checkbox to the left of the 2 '''courses''' in order to select them.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Mathematics / 1st year Maths '''in the drop down '''Move selected courses to…'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Then in the dropdown '''Move selected courses to…''', select '''Mathematics / 1st year Maths'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Move '''button.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| And click on the '''Move''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the success message.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We get a success message''' -'''

'''Successfully moved 2 courses into 1st year Maths'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the number of courses.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Note that the number of '''courses''' under '''Mathematics''' has become 0 and that under '''1st year Maths '''is 2.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''1st year Maths '''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''1st year Maths sub-category.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the sort options.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We can see our '''courses''' listed under this '''subcategory'''.

This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| <PAUSE>

Let us summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 6:'''

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt:

* How to create '''a course'''
* How to perform actions like edit, move, etc. on '''courses'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 7:'''

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is an assignment for you:

* Add 2 '''courses '''to the '''subcategory 2nd Year Maths '''under''' Mathematics, '''namely''' '''
** '''Multivariable calculus''' and
** '''Advanced Algebra.'''

* Refer to assignment-code file of this tutorial for details.
* Edit the '''courses''' to start on 15th October 2017.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''8:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 9:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 10:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)

* Do you have questions in THIS '''Spoken Tutorial'''?
* Please visit '''http://forums.spoken-tutorial.org'''
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* Someone from our team will answer them

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Show Slide 11:

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Priyanka.

And this is Nancy Varkey along with the spoken tutorial team signing off. Thanks for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Admin-dashboard/English

2017-07-31T07:13:19Z

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Blocks-in-Admin-Dashboard/English

2017-07-31T07:11:43Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

'''Blocks in Admin's Dashboard'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Blocks in Admin's Dashboard'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Add and delete '''blocks''' and
* Set the '''Front page'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To record this tutorial I am using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 16.04'''
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30'''
* '''Moodle 3.3 '''and
* And '''Firefox '''web browser

You may use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

Prerequisites
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| * Learners of this tutorial should have basic knowledge of the '''Admin’s dashboard'''
* If not, please refer to the relevant''' Moodle''' tutorials on this website.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser.

Enter http://127.0.0.1/moodle/
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Switch to the browser and open your '''Moodle site.'''

Make sure that the '''XAMPP service''' is running.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Login
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Login with your '''admin username''' and '''password''' details.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We are now in the '''Admin’s dashboard.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Blocks in Moodle
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Recall that:

* '''Blocks''' serve a specific purpose or information.
* And are found on all pages of '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the blocks on the right.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us understand how we can work with '''Moodle Blocks''' now.

Depending on the '''theme''' used, '''blocks''' can be on the right side or on both sides.

'''Blocks''' contain information we want people to see whenever they log in.

There are many types of '''blocks''' available in '''Moodle.'''

And they can be moved or arranged easily as per our preferences.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We will now add a few '''blocks''' to our '''dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the navigation menu.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the '''navigation menu '''on the left of the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Customise this page '''button.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Customise this page''' button on the right hand side of the '''dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add a block'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice that a new menu item '''Add a block''' is visible now.

Click on '''Add a block'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| A new pop-up window opens.

We need to select the type of '''block''' that we want to add.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Messages'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| For example, click on '''Messages'''.

You can see that the '''Messages block '''now appears in the '''dashboard'''.

Currently there are no messages.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the rightmost column.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| By default, all new '''blocks '''get added to the right-most column.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Add a block'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us add one more '''block'''.

Click on '''Add a block '''menu on the left.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''HTML'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''HTML''' from the list of '''menu types'''.

'''HTML block''' is a '''block''' where one can write custom '''HTML'''.

Using this, we can embed '''widgets''', such as '''Library widgets, News feeds, Twitter, Facebook,''' etc.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''HTML block'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Notice now that a '''new HTML block''' has been added below the '''Messages block'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon >> then click on '''Configure (new HTML block) block'''.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon in the '''HTML block'''.

Then click on '''Configure (new HTML block) block'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the 3 sections.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Configure HTML block''' has 3 '''sections''':

# '''Block settings'''
# '''Where this block appears '''and
# '''On this page'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the first '''section.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| By default, the first '''section''' is expanded.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Expand all'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Expand all''' to expand all the '''sections'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Type '''Things to do '''in the '''block title''' field.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| In the '''block '''title, let’s type '''“Things to do”.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the '''Content area'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us add some tasks for this '''admin user''' in the '''Content area.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Type in the content field:

* '''Create a new course'''
* '''Create new users'''
* '''Add users to the course'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Type the following:

* '''Create a new course'''
* '''Create new users'''
* '''Add users to the course'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the '''HTML editor'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| The '''editor''' is an '''HTML editor''' and can be used like any other '''word processor '''or '''editor'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to '''Where this block appears'''.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to see the options under '''Where this block appears'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Content''' from the '''Default region''' dropdown.

Select '''-10''' in the '''Default weight''' dropdown.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Under '''Default region''', select '''Content'''.

In '''Default weight''', select -10.

The lower the weight of a '''block''', the higher it will appear in that region.

-10 is the lowest.

By selecting -10, I am ensuring that it is at the top of the '''content '''region.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| This '''block '''will appear on the '''Admin’s dashboard. '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to '''“On this page” section'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Now comes the '''“On this page” section.'''

This''' '''is where you can define the configuration for the page where this '''block''' was added.

In our case, this is the '''dashboard.'''

This configuration will override the default configuration defined in the above section.

That is the '''Where this block appears '''section.

Let us select '''Content''' in '''Region '''and -10 in '''Weight''' in this section.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Please note that depending on the type of the '''block''', configuration settings will vary.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Save changes'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click '''Save Changes''' to save the changes and go back to the '''dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Point to the HTML block
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| See that the new '''HTML block''' with the title '''Things to do '''is now visible.

And it is the topmost '''block''' in the '''content '''region.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Demo using the Move icon
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We can also change the position of a '''block''' by dragging it using the '''Move '''icon.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Drag '''Things to do block''' and place it below '''Course Overview''' block.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us move '''Things to do block''' below the '''Course Overview block''' by dragging and dropping it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon.

Click on '''Configure Things to do block.'''

Click on '''Expand All'''.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us see how this changes the configuration we set a few minutes back.

Click on the gear icon and then on '''Configure Things to do block.'''

Then click on '''Expand All'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight the value in '''weight''' field

Click '''Cancel'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to see '''“On this page” '''section. The weight has changed to -2.

The '''default weight''', however remains the same.

Click '''Cancel''' to go back to the '''dashboard'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on the gear icon.

Click on '''Delete Learning plans block'''

Click on '''Yes '''in the pop-up window.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We do not need this '''Learning Plans block'''. So let us delete it.

Click on the gear icon and then on '''Delete Learning plans block'''.

Confirm pop up window appears and prompts us to make sure about this deletion.

Click on''' Yes''' button here.

Notice that the '''Learning Plans block''' is no longer available.

We can always add this '''block''' later if required.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us now customize the '''front page''' of our '''Moodle''' installation.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Site Administration.'''

Click on '''Front Page.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on '''Site Administration''' link on the left menu.

Scroll down to locate '''Front Page settings''' in the '''Front page''' section. Click on it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Full Site Name-> Digital India Learning Management System.

Point to the top of breadcrumbs.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us change the '''Full Site Name '''to '''Digital India Learning Management System'''.

This is the text that appears at the top of every page above the '''breadcrumbs'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Highlight '''Short name'''

Hover over the title.

Point to the '''logo text.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Short name''' is the text that appears in the title of the page.

Notice that the title of this page is '''Digital India LMS''' followed by the name of the page we are in.

'''Short name''' is also used as a logo text if we do not provide any logo image.

We will leave it as it is.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on Front page items dropdown.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down to see dropdowns for '''Front page''' items.

These are the list of items that can be shown on the front page.

All visitors, whether they are logged in or not, can see these items.

The order is determined by a combination box.

We will leave this as it is.

So all users will be able to see the list of courses (if available) and nothing else.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Click on Front page items when logged in dropdown
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Next is the '''Front page items when logged in.'''

This is the list of items that can be shown to the users who are logged in.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Select '''Enrolled courses'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Let us select '''Enrolled courses''' in the first drop-down.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| We will leave the rest of the options with their default values.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Scroll down and click on '''Save Changes'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 6''':

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| <PAUSE>

Let us now summarize.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Change add to Add on the slide
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt to:

* Add an HTML block called “Things to do” and specified where it should appear on the page.
* We also set up the '''frontpage''' for guests and logged-in users.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| '''Show Slide 7''':

Assignment
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.106cm;"| Here is an assignment for you:

* Delete the '''Private files block '''

* Add a new '''HTML block''' using the guidelines given in the '''assignment-text''' file

* This file has been provided in the '''Code files''' link.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''8:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 9:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 10:'''

Forum for Specific Questions

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Priyanka.

This is Nancy Varkey along with the spoken tutorial team signing off. Thank you for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Installing-Moodle-on-Local-Server/English

2017-07-26T16:16:01Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

Installing Moodle on Local Server.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on ''Installing Moodle on Local Server.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn how to
* '''Download Moodle''' and
* Install '''Moodle'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

System Prerequisites

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To install '''Moodle''' in your system, you should have a system supporting:

* '''Apache''' 2.x (or higher version)
* '''MariaDB '''5.5.30 (or any higher version) and
* '''PHP''' 5.4.4 +(or any higher version) 

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

OS, Web Server and Moodle Versions

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To record this tutorial, I will be using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS '''16.04
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30 '''
* '''Moodle''' 3.3 and
* '''Firefox '''web browser.

You can use any web browser of your choice.

However, '''Internet Explorer''' should be avoided, as it causes some display inconsistencies.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|

| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Please ensure that you have '''Internet''' connectivity before you begin.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Prerequisites check
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Also refer to the previous tutorials in this series.

And ensure that the prerequisites are met and the '''database''' is setup properly.

*We should have '''XAMPP''' running and
*We should have a '''database''' set up with '''username moodle-st'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Open '''Firefox'''
In the address bar type,
'''http://127.0.0.1'''
>> press '''Enter.'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| First, let me go to the web browser and launch '''XAMPP.'''

In the address bar, type
'''http colon double slash 127 dot 0 dot 0 dot 1 '''
and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In the top menu >> click on '''phpinfo'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In the menu at the top right of the screen, click on '''PHPinfo.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Type Ctrl+F >> type DOCUMENT_ROOT in the search window >> Press Enter'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Now press '''Ctrl + F''' keys and search for '''DOCUMENT underscore ROOT.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Point to'''Apache Environment'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|It will be found in the table '''Apache Environment'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|The value of '''DOCUMENT underscore ROOT''' will be either
* '''slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs '''or
* '''slash var slash www'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Point or highlight '''/opt/lampp/htdocs'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In my machine, it is '''slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Please make a note of this path.
We are going to install '''Moodle''' here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Downloading Moodle (Browser)'''

Go to http://www.moodle.org
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Let’s now start downloading '''Moodle'''.

Go to the official website of '''Moodle''' which is
moodle.org

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on '''Downloads''' >> click on '''MOODLE 3.3. '''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on the '''Downloads''' link in the top menu.

And then click on the latest release button '''MOODLE 3.3+. '''

At the time of recording this tutorial, the latest stable '''Moodle''' version is 3.3.

It could be different when you try.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click '''Download zip''' button.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on the '''Download zip''' button.
This will start downloading '''Moodle''' on our machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| I have already downloaded this file and it is in my '''Downloads''' folder.

So I will skip this step.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Open the terminal by pressing '''Ctrl + Alt + T''' keys together.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Switch to the terminal
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| On the terminal, I will change the directory to '''Downloads.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Switch to the terminal >> Type
'''cd Downloads'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To do that, type the command:
'''cd space Downloads'''
and press '''Enter.'''
You will have to type the''' path '''where you downloaded '''Moodle''' on your system.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type
'''ls''' >> press '''Enter.'''
Point to '''moodle''' zip file.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Once you are in that directory, type '''ls''' and press '''Enter''' to list the files therein.

Here is my '''Moodle''' installation file. It has the name '''moodle hyphen latest hyphen 33 dot zip'''
If you had renamed it to some other name during download, then locate that file in your folder.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Next, we have to extract the contents of this '''zip''' file into the '''moodle''' folder.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type
'''sudo unzip moodle-latest-33.zip -d /opt/lampp/htdocs/'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| At the '''command prompt''', type:
'''sudo space unzip space moodle hyphen latest hyphen 33 dot zip space hyphen d space slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs slash'''
Now press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Press '''Ctrl + L'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Let’s clear the terminal by pressing '''Ctrl + L.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''cd /opt/lampp/htdocs'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Now type
'''cd space slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs'''
and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type''' ls'''

Highlight the '''Moodle''' directory
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To list the files in this directory, type '''ls''' and press '''Enter'''.

You can see that a new folder named '''moodle''' has been created.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Give read, write and execute permissions
Type '''sudo chmod 777 moodle/'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Let us give '''read, write''' and '''execute permissions''' to the '''owner''' and the '''group members''' of '''moodle''' folder.
So type -
'''sudo space chmod space 777 space moodle slash'''
and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter the '''administrative '''password if prompted and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''SLIDE 6:'''

(Switch to browser)
http://127.0.0.1/moodle
Or
'''http://localhost/moodle'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Now switch to the browser and type -

'''http colon double slash 127.0.0.1 slash moodle '''
or
'''http colon double slash localhost slash moodle'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Highlight '''localhost'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| I have typed my '''localhost IP''' here.
This '''IP''' necessarily has to be the '''IP''' of the machine on which '''moodle''' is installed.
Please note that '''moodle''' is the folder into which we had extracted earlier.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Press '''Enter'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Press '''Enter''' and you will see the '''Moodle''' installation page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| By default, we are in step number one, that is, '''Configuration.'''
Pls note: '''Moodle''' can be installed in multiple languages.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Select '''English''' >> click on '''Next '''button.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| But we will limit ourselves to English language only.

So, select '''English '''here.
Click on '''Next''' button below the language dropdown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Paths:'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Next is the '''Paths''' page.

This is where the '''web address, moodle directory''' and '''data directory''' are defined.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 7: Web Address'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Web address''' is the '''URL''' for us to access '''Moodle''' once installed.

This is the same '''URL''' that we entered above, which is shown here:

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 8: Moodle directory'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Moodle directory''' is the folder where all the '''Moodle''' code is available.

Notice here - both '''Web address '''and '''Moodle directory''' are non-editable fields.

These cannot be changed by us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Switch to the browser. Highlight '''Data directory.'''

'''Show Slide 9: Data directory'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Next is the '''Data directory'''.

This is the folder where all file content uploaded by teachers and students, will be stored.

This folder needs to have '''read''' and '''write permission''' so the files can be stored here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| However it should not be directly accessible on the web for security reasons.

So, it is to be kept outside of the installation folder.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Switch to the browser.

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''moodledata''' inside the folder '''lampp''' is the default '''data directory''' which the '''installer''' tries to create.

However, it does not have the permission to create a folder here.

So, we have to create this folder manually and give it the required permissions.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on Terminal window.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Go to the '''terminal''' window.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In the terminal window, type
'''sudo mkdir /opt/lampp/moodledata'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| At the '''prompt''', type
'''sudo space mkdir space slash opt slash lampp slash moodledata'''
and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type:

'''sudo chmod 777 /opt/lampp/moodledata '''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Now, type - '''sudo space chmod space 777 space slash opt slash lampp slash moodledata'''
and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Browser
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Go back to the browser now and click on '''Next''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Choose Database driver (browser):'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| After this comes the '''database configuration''' page.

Select '''MariaDB''' from the dropdown and click on the '''Next''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Database configurations (browser):'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter '''localhost''' as the '''Database Host Name.'''

Now, we have to enter the '''database name, username''' and '''password'''.
These are the ones we created earlier in '''phpMyAdmin.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Database name'''
Type '''moodle-st'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| I will enter '''moodle-st''' as the '''database name.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Database User'''
'''Type moodle-st'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Then '''moodle-st''' as the '''database username.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Database Password '''
Type '''moodle-st'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| And '''moodle-st''' as my''' database password.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on '''Next'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Leave the '''Table Prefix '''and the other fields as they are and click '''Next.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on '''Continue'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We can see a '''terms and conditions''' page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''License''' >> Click on '''Continue'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| This is the step where you need to read the license agreement and agree to the same.

Read the text and then click on '''Continue.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Point to '''Server Checks'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We can see the '''Server Checks '''page next.

Scroll down to see the message '''Your server environment meets all minimum requirements'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Show the screen shot

Add the text:
Refer to the Additional reading material link of this tutorial for the solution.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| You may get other errors as shown:

Refer to the '''Additional reading material '''link of this tutorial for the solution.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on '''Continue'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on '''Continue.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| This step may take some time depending on your Internet speed.

You may get an error message '''Site is being upgraded, please retry later''' if you refresh the page.

In that case, please refresh after some time.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click '''Continue'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click '''Continue''' when you get a success message for the installation.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The next page is for '''administrator configuration.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''admin''' as username.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter the '''username''' that you want for the '''Moodle Administrative''' page.
I will enter the '''username''' as '''admin.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Default Password rules for '''Moodle'''

Highlight the rules on the screen
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Now enter a password for the '''Moodle Administrator.'''

The password here must follow these rules as shown here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''Spokentutorial1@''' as password.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To enter the password, click on '''Click to enter text''' link.
I will enter '''Spokentutorial1@''' as my '''admin password.'''
Click on '''Unmask''' icon to reveal the password.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Note down the '''username''' and '''password''' that you have created for future use.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type priyankaspokentutorial@gmail.com in the email address field.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Email address''' is a mandatory field.

I will enter priyankaspokentutorial@gmail.com here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Select a country ->''' India'''

Timezone -> '''Asia/Kolkata'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In '''Select a country''' dropdown, select '''India.'''

Select the timezone as '''Asia/Kolkata'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We will leave rest of the fields with their default values.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click '''Update Profile.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Scroll down and click on '''Update Profile''' button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Please note that '''Moodle''' is a resource consuming software.

Every step may take time to complete.

Please wait for the next page to load and do not close or refresh the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The next screen is for''' Front page settings'''.

This is the page people will see when they visit our '''moodle site.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''Digital India LMS''' in '''Full Site Name''' field
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter '''Digital India LMS''' as the '''Full Site Name.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''Digital India LMS''' in '''Short name for site''' field
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter '''Digital India LMS''' again as the '''Short name for site. '''

This is what will be visible as the name of the '''moodle site''' in the navigation bar.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Let us leave the '''Front Page Summary''' as blank for now.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Timezone: '''Asia/ kolkata'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Select the timezone as '''Asia/Kolkata.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Self Registration : '''Disable.'''

No-reply address: noreply@localhost.com

Click on '''Save Changes'''.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The next dropdown is '''Self Registration'''.

If '''Self Registration '''is enabled, then new users can register themselves on their own.

Select '''Disable '''from the dropdown.

Next is the text box '''no-reply address'''.
The default value in this field is''' noreply@localhost. '''

Since this is not a valid email ID, change it to noreply@localhost.com.

This email ID will be shown as '''From''' address, when '''Moodle''' does not have any email ID to show.

For example, if I specify to keep my address as''' private''', all mails sent on my behalf will have this email ID.

Lastly, click on '''Save Changes '''button.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We are now ready to use '''Moodle. '''

You can see the front page of the new site here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''12:'''

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| With this we come to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarize.

In this tutorial, we learnt to:
* Download '''Moodle''' from '''moodle.org''' and
* install '''Moodle''' on local server

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 14:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 15:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| * Do you have questions in THIS '''Spoken Tutorial'''?
* Please visit '''http://forums.spoken-tutorial.org'''
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* Someone from our team will answer them

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 16:'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| * The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial
* Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them
* This will help reduce the clutter
* With less clutter, we can use these discussion as instructional material

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 17:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Priyanka.

This is Nancy Varkey along with the spoken tutorial team signing off. Thank you for joining.

|}

Moodle-Learning-Management-System/C2/Getting-Ready-for-Moodle-Installation/English

2017-07-26T14:04:06Z

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Visual Cue'''''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''''Narration'''''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 1:'''

Getting ready for Moodle Installation.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Getting ready for Moodle installation.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 2:'''

Learning Objectives:
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn about the prerequisites for installing '''Moodle.'''

We will also learn to

* Check for packages on localhost
* and database setup

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 3:'''

OS, Web Server and Versions

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To record this tutorial, I will be using:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS '''16.04
* '''Apache, MariaDB '''and''' PHP''' obtained through''' XAMPP 5.6.30 '''and
* '''Firefox '''web browser.

You can use any web browser of your choice.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 4:'''

System Prerequisites for installing XAMPP

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| To install '''Moodle 3.3''' in your system, you should have a machine that supports:

* '''Apache''' 2.x (or higher version)
* '''MariaDB '''5.5.30 (or any higher version) and
* '''PHP''' 5.4.4 +(or any higher version) 

If you have older versions of the above, ideally uninstall these before proceeding ahead.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Previous slide'''

Highlight MariaDB with the cursor.
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''MariaDB''' is the fastest growing open source database.

It is an alternative for '''MySQL''' database.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 5:'''

Web Server Distribution

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Web server distributions give you''' Apache''',''' MariaDB''' and''' PHP''' bundled in one.

You can either install these separately.

Or using a Web server distribution like''' XAMPP''',''' WAMPP''' or''' LAMPP'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| I have already installed '''XAMPP''' in my machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| First of all, we should check if '''XAMPP''' is running on our machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Open Firefox

In the address bar type,

'''http://127.0.0.1'''

>> press''' Enter.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In the web browser, type '''http colon double slash 127 dot 0 dot 0 dot 1 '''and press '''Enter'''.

It shows a message '''Unable to connect. '''This means '''XAMPP '''service is not running.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Open terminal by pressing '''Ctrl+Alt+T'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| So, we have to start the '''XAMPP service.'''

Let’s open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Ctrl + Alt + T''' keys together.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Start '''XAMPP''' by typing

'''sudo space slash opt slash lampp slash lampp space start'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter the administrative password at the prompt.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter the '''administrative''' password when prompted and press '''Enter'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Highlight the message''' Starting XAMPP for Linux '''…. on the terminal.

Highlight Mysql in the '''starting XAMPP for Linux '''command
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| If you get a message that says

'''Starting XAMPP for Linux '''….

'''XAMPP: Starting Apache...ok.'''

'''XAMPP: Starting MySQL...ok.'''

'''XAMPP: Starting ProFTPD...ok.'''

It means that '''XAMPP''' is installed in your system and you have started the service.

Please note '''XAMPP 5.6.30''' uses '''MariaDB''' instead of '''MySQL'''.

The commands and tools are the same for both.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Go to the browser. Refresh.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Let us go back to the browser and refresh the page.

We can now see the '''XAMPP''' screen.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Slide 7:'''

XAMPP not installed
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| You may get a message saying, '''Command not found'''.

This means '''XAMPP''' is not installed in your machine.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Slide 8:'''

'''XAMPP Installation'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| If so, refer to the '''XAMPP Installation''' tutorial in the '''PHP and MySQL Series''' on this website.

Follow the instructions specified in the above tutorial and install the latest version of '''XAMPP'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Switch to the terminal
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Let’s switch back to the '''terminal'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Highlight the command '''sudo /opt/lampp/lampp start'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Now follow the steps shown above, to start '''XAMPP service'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Check PHP version
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Let us check the version of '''PHP''' on our system now.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''sudo /opt/lampp/bin/php -v'''

Press '''Enter'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| On the '''terminal''' type

'''sudo space slash opt slash lampp slash bin slash php space hyphen v'''

and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter '''Administrative''' Password if prompted >> Press '''Enter'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter the '''administrative''' password, if prompted and press '''Enter'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Highlight the version of '''PHP''' on the terminal.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| My version of '''PHP '''is '''5.6.30'''.

This message indicates that '''PHP '''is installed successfully.

If you get a version lesser than '''5.4.4''', you should install the latest version of '''XAMPP'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Next, let us check the version of '''MariaDB''' on our system.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''sudo /opt/lampp/bin/mysql -v'''

Press '''Enter'''

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| On the '''terminal''', type '''sudo space slash opt slash lampp slash bin slash mysql space hyphen v'''

and press '''Enter'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter '''Administrative''' Password if prompted >>

Press '''Enter'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter the '''administrative''' password, if prompted and press '''Enter'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Highlight the version of '''MariaDB''' on the terminal.
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| My version of '''MariaDB '''is '''10.1.21'''

If you get a version lesser than '''5.5.30''', you should install the latest version of '''XAMPP'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Please note.

You should have '''XAMPP''' running, to check the versions of '''PHP''' and database.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''\q'''

Press '''Enter'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Also note that the '''command prompt '''has now changed.

Type '''backslash q''' and press '''Enter '''to exit '''MariaDB'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| You may also get other errors as shown here.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Slide 8:'''

Error 1:

| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| You may get a message that says “'''An apache daemon is already running”.'''

It means the startup script did not start''' XAMPP-Apache.'''

This indicates that there is another '''Apache instance''' already running.

To start '''XAMPP '''properly, you will have to first stop this '''daemon'''.

The command to stop '''Apache''' is

'''sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 space stop'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Slide 9:'''

Error2 : MySQL daemon failed to start

Highlight mysql in the slide
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| You may get a message that says '''MySQL daemon failed to start.'''

This means the startup script did not start '''MySQL'''.

This indicates that there is another '''database instance''' already running.

To start '''XAMPP''' properly, first you have to stop this '''daemon.'''

This command will stop '''MySQL''':

'''sudo space /etc/init.d/mysql space stop '''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Switch to browser [http://localhost/ http://]127.0.0.1'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Resolve all the errors and get '''XAMPP''' running successfully.

Then switch to your web browser and refresh the page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Select''' English '''if prompted'''.'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| If prompted for language selection, select '''English'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Slide 10:'''

Adding a User and Creating database
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We will now need to add a user and create a '''database''' for '''Moodle'''.

We will do this in '''phpmyadmin''', which is the graphical user interface for '''MariaDB'''.

It comes along with the '''XAMPP''' installation.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Creating Database:

Click on '''phpmyadmin'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Let us go back to the browser.

On the '''XAMPP''' page, in the menu at the top, click on '''phpMyadmin'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on '''Users accounts''' >> click on '''Add User account'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on '''User Accounts''' in the top menu and then click on '''Add User Account'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type '''moodle-st'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In the new window that opens, enter a '''username '''of your choice.

I will type '''moodle hyphen st '''as my '''username.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Select '''Local''' from the dropdown
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| From the '''Host''' drop-down list, select '''Local'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In '''Password''' textbox >> Type '''moodle-st'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Enter a '''password '''of your choice in the '''Password''' text-box.

I will type '''moodle hyphen st '''as my '''password'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Re-type '''moodle-st'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Type the same password in the '''Re-type''' textbox.

Keep the''' Authentication Plugin '''option as it is.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Point to the option
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Please do not click on '''Generate Password''' prompt for now.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Point to '''Create a database with the same name and grant all privileges'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Under '''Database for user account''', we can see the option-''' '''

'''Create database with same name and grant all privileges.'''

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Click on it >> Click on '''Go''' button
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We will check that option and click the''' Go''' button at the bottom right of this page.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Point to the moodle-st database in the side pane
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We can see a message '''“You have added a new user”''' at the top of the window.

It means a new '''database''' with the name '''moodle-st''' and with a user '''moodle-st '''has been created.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Make a note of the '''username, password''' and '''database''' names.

These will be required later to complete the '''Moodle''' installation.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 11:'''

Rules and Naming Conventions
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| Please note:

* '''Database''' name and '''username''' need not be the same.
* To have different names, create the '''database''' first and then create a user for that '''database'''.
* Also, as per naming convention, '''username''' should not have any spaces in between.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Point to the page'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We now have '''XAMPP''' running and our '''database''' is ready.

We are now ready to install '''Moodle'''.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| We will continue with the installation of '''Moodle''' in the next tutorial.

With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''12:'''

Summary
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt:

* About the prerequisites for installing Moodle.
* How to check for the prerequisites and
* How to setup the database

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide''' '''13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 14:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 15:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Forum)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| * Do you have questions in THIS '''Spoken Tutorial'''?
* Please visit '''http://forums.spoken-tutorial.org'''
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* Someone from our team will answer them

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 16:'''
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| * The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial
* Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them
* This will help reduce the clutter
* With less clutter, we can use these discussion as instructional material

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Show Slide 17:'''

(Acknowledgement)
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"|
| style="border:1pt solid #000001;padding:0.176cm;"| This script has been contributed by Priyanka.

This is Nancy Varkey along with the spoken tutorial team signing off. Thank you for joining.

|}

Joomla

2016-05-04T06:14:16Z

Itspriyanka:

'''Joomla''' is a '''Content Management System (CMS)''' and helps one store content (text, documents, photos, videos etc) on websites. It can be used for building websites of all kinds - corporate, personal, eCommerce, charity, educational, travel, news, magazines etc. '''Joomla 1.0''' was released in September 2005 and the Joomla developer community keeps adding features with every release. It is a free and open source software (FOSS) which makes it one of the most popular CMS.

A major advantage of using a CMS is that it requires no technical knowledge to manage a website. It has powerful extensions and plugins that can help a user create galleries, polls, searches, chats, forums and many other utilities easily without requiring any technical development skills.

The Spoken Tutorial Effort for '''Joomla''' Basic level has been contributed by '''Priyanka''' from Hyderabad supported with domain reviews by '''Dr.Ambuja Salgaonkar''' from Mumbai.

__TOC__

==Basic Level==

1. '''Overview of Joomla'''

* Explain the concept of Content Management System
* Introduce Joomla as a CMS
* Software and hardware requirements for running Joomla
* OS and Joomla version to be used for the series
* Overview of the key features that will be demonstrated in the Joomla series

2. '''Installing Joomla on localhost'''

* Install Joomla on Linux machine
* Cross verify the installation

3. '''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla '''

* Explain the common mistakes that happen when installing Joomla
* Demonstrate solutions to those mistakes
* Explain how to uninstall Joomla

4. '''Creating Articles in Joomla'''

* Explain about Article Manager in Joomla
* Create a new Article
* Edit and existing Article
* Make a copy of an article
* Delete an article

5. '''Article Options in Joomla'''

* Explain about status of an article
* Explain about various publishing options
* Explain about the global options for articles

6. '''Formatting Article in Joomla'''

* Demonstrate basic formatting for an article
* Explain about styling an article text
* Demonstrate how to insert lists, page breaks and read more link.

7. '''Categories in Joomla'''

* Explain about Category Manager
* Explain how to create and edit categories
* Explain how to create sub-categories
* Explain how to assign articles to a category
* Explain how to move or copy articles to a different category
* Explain the difference between deleting and unpublishing a category and how to perform the two operations

8. '''Menus in Joomla'''

* Explain menus and their importance in Joomla
* Explain about Menu Manager
* Explain how to create menu items and submenus
* Demonstrate how to change the default homepage
* Explain how to unpublish menu items

Joomla

2016-05-04T06:13:07Z

Itspriyanka:

'''Joomla''' is a '''Content Management System (CMS)''' and helps one store content (text, documents, photos, videos etc) on websites. It can be used for building websites of all kinds - corporate, personal, eCommerce, charity, educational, travel, news, magazines etc. '''Joomla 1.0''' was released in September 2005 and the Joomla developer community keeps adding features with every release. It is a free and open source software (FOSS) which makes it one of the most popular CMS.

A major advantage of using a CMS is that it requires no technical knowledge to manage a website. It has powerful extensions and plugins that can help a user create galleries, polls, searches, chats, forums and many other utilities easily without requiring any technical development skills.

The Spoken Tutorial Effort for '''Joomla''' Basic level has been contributed by '''Priyanka''' from Hyderabad supported with domain reviews by '''Dr.Ambuja Salgaokar''' from Mumbai.

__TOC__

==Basic Level==

1. '''Overview of Joomla'''

* Explain the concept of Content Management System
* Introduce Joomla as a CMS
* Software and hardware requirements for running Joomla
* OS and Joomla version to be used for the series
* Overview of the key features that will be demonstrated in the Joomla series

2. '''Installing Joomla on localhost'''

* Install Joomla on Linux machine
* Cross verify the installation

3. '''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla '''

* Explain the common mistakes that happen when installing Joomla
* Demonstrate solutions to those mistakes
* Explain how to uninstall Joomla

4. '''Creating Articles in Joomla'''

* Explain about Article Manager in Joomla
* Create a new Article
* Edit and existing Article
* Make a copy of an article
* Delete an article

5. '''Article Options in Joomla'''

* Explain about status of an article
* Explain about various publishing options
* Explain about the global options for articles

6. '''Formatting Article in Joomla'''

* Demonstrate basic formatting for an article
* Explain about styling an article text
* Demonstrate how to insert lists, page breaks and read more link.

7. '''Categories in Joomla'''

* Explain about Category Manager
* Explain how to create and edit categories
* Explain how to create sub-categories
* Explain how to assign articles to a category
* Explain how to move or copy articles to a different category
* Explain the difference between deleting and unpublishing a category and how to perform the two operations

8. '''Menus in Joomla'''

* Explain menus and their importance in Joomla
* Explain about Menu Manager
* Explain how to create menu items and submenus
* Demonstrate how to change the default homepage
* Explain how to unpublish menu items

Joomla

2016-05-04T05:35:52Z

Itspriyanka:

'''Joomla''' is a '''Content Management System (CMS)''' and helps one store content (text, documents, photos, videos etc) on websites. It can be used for building websites of all kinds - corporate, personal, eCommerce, charity, educational, travel, news, magazines etc. '''Joomla 1.0''' was released in September 2005 and the Joomla developer community keeps adding features with every release. It is a free and open source software (FOSS) which makes it one of the most popular CMS.

A major advantage of using a CMS is that it requires no technical knowledge to manage a website. It has powerful extensions and plugins that can help a user create galleries, polls, searches, chats, forums and many other utilities easily without requiring any technical development skills.

__TOC__

==Basic Level==

1. '''Overview of Joomla'''

* Explain the concept of Content Management System
* Introduce Joomla as a CMS
* Software and hardware requirements for running Joomla
* OS and Joomla version to be used for the series
* Overview of the key features that will be demonstrated in the Joomla series

2. '''Installing Joomla on localhost'''

* Install Joomla on Linux machine
* Cross verify the installation

3. '''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla '''

* Explain the common mistakes that happen when installing Joomla
* Demonstrate solutions to those mistakes
* Explain how to uninstall Joomla

4. '''Creating Articles in Joomla'''

* Explain about Article Manager in Joomla
* Create a new Article
* Edit and existing Article
* Make a copy of an article
* Delete an article

5. '''Article Options in Joomla'''

* Explain about status of an article
* Explain about various publishing options
* Explain about the global options for articles

6. '''Formatting Article in Joomla'''

* Demonstrate basic formatting for an article
* Explain about styling an article text
* Demonstrate how to insert lists, page breaks and read more link.

7. '''Categories in Joomla'''

* Explain about Category Manager
* Explain how to create and edit categories
* Explain how to create sub-categories
* Explain how to assign articles to a category
* Explain how to move or copy articles to a different category
* Explain the difference between deleting and unpublishing a category and how to perform the two operations

8. '''Menus in Joomla'''

* Explain menus and their importance in Joomla
* Explain about Menu Manager
* Explain how to create menu items and submenus
* Demonstrate how to change the default homepage
* Explain how to unpublish menu items

Joomla/C2/Overview-of-Joomla/English

2016-04-29T18:13:03Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Overview of Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Overview of Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* the concept of '''Content Management Systems''' (or '''CMS''' in short).
* Joomla as a '''CMS'''
* Software and hardware requirements for running '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn about the:

* '''Operating System''' and '''Joomla''' version to be used and
* Overview of the key features that will be demonstrated in the '''Joomla''' series.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
Prerequisites

|| Learner of this tutorial should know how to browse a website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
Content Management System (CMS)

|| Let us first understand what '''Content Management System''' or '''CMS''' is.
* A '''CMS''' is a software used to manage the content of a website.
* It keeps track of every piece of content on the website.
* It allows one to create, modify and remove content from a website without knowing programming skills.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6:'''
Why is '''Joomla''' popular?

|| Why is '''Joomla''' a popular '''CMS'''?
* '''Joomla''' is easy to install and use.
* It supports multiple language websites
* There are many predefined ready-to-use '''Joomla templates''' available online and
* '''Joomla''' has many '''extensions''' that allow additional features to be installed easily.

|-
|| Switch to the browser.

Open http://www.hondashellybeach.co.za/ on the browser.

Open http://www.gsas.harvard.edu/

Open http://www.businesstoday-eg.com/

Open http://www.joy.com.gr/

Open http://www.thisisboo.com/

Open http://community.joomla.org/showcase/sites.html

|| Let us see what kind of websites use '''Joomla''' as the base.

* A corporate website like this.

* An educational one like '''Harvard University''' website

* Websites of media houses, we have '''Business Today''' website here.

* A Greek Ecommerce website like this, Personal websites like these and many more…

'''Joomla''' provides a list of featured websites at the following URL :
http://community.joomla.org/showcase/sites.html

Here you will find the popular '''Joomla''' websites in various categories.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 7:'''
Software requirements for '''Joomla'''

|| To install '''Joomla''', we need:

1. A webserver like '''Apache''' or '''IIS'''

2. A database like '''MySQL''' or '''PostgreSQL'''

3. and '''PHP'''

|-
||
|| At the time of making of this tutorial, '''Joomla 3.4.1''' is the latest version.

The '''Joomla developer community''' keeps releasing newer versions with added features.

It is always recommended to work with the latest stable version that is available.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Prerequisites for '''Joomla 3.4.1'''

|| '''Joomla 3.4.1''' requires the following:

* '''Apache 2.x +''' or '''IIS 7 +'''
* '''MySQL 5.0.4 +''' and
* '''PHP 5.2.4 +'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 9:'''
Software used for the series

|| For this series we have used the following:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 14.04''' and
* '''Apache, MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP 5.5.19'''

|-
||

|| Now, let me list out a few of the key features covered in this series.

|-
|| Point to the various tabs in the Browser

|| For ease of navigation, I have already opened the tutorials in multiple tabs on my browser.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 10:'''
'''Installing Joomla on a localhost'''

|| The tutorial '''Installing Joomla on a localhost''' explains how to -
* install '''Joomla''' on a '''Linux''' machine
* and cross-check the correctness of your installation

Let’s have a look.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 11:'''
'''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla'''

|| '''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla''' tutorial explains -
* the common mistakes that people make during the installation process
* and the steps to uninstall '''Joomla'''

Let’s have a look.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 12:'''
'''Creating Articles in Joomla'''

|| '''Creating Articles in Joomla''' tutorial -
* explains how to create '''articles'''
* and manage '''articles''' using the '''Article Manager''' page

Here is a glimpse.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 13:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Article Options''' tutorial -
* explains various options such as '''Status, Filters, Global Options''', etc.

Let me run through this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 14:'''
Same as narration

|| The next tutorial in this series is '''Formatting Articles in Joomla.'''

In this tutorial, we will learn about formatting options like -
* '''WYSISYG''', also pronounced as '''wiz-ee-wig Article Editor''' in '''Joomla'''
* Styling the '''article''' text
* Inserting lists, page-breaks and '''Read More''' link, etc.

Here is a glimpse of this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 15:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Categories in Joomla''' tutorial will help us to understand
* how to group '''articles''' into different '''categories'''
* and create '''sub-categories''' within '''categories.'''

Let’s have a look at this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 16:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Menus in Joomla''' tutorial will help us to understand -
* how to create '''menus''' and '''sub-menus'''
* and how to link '''articles''' under them.

Let us continue with this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Slide 17:'''
Introduction slides to next tutorials

|| There will be many more tutorials in this series in the future.

These will reveal us a few advanced features that are available in '''Joomla CMS.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 17:'''
Summary

|| For now, let us summarize.

In this tutorial we have learnt:

* '''Content Management System.'''
* '''Joomla''' as a '''CMS'''
* Software and hardware requirements for the execution of '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 18:'''
Summary - continued
|| We also learnt about the:
* '''OS''' and '''Joomla version''' that would be used for this series.
* We took an overview of the key features those will be demonstrated in the '''Joomla''' series.

|-
||'''Show Slide 19:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 20:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 21:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''
More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Overview-of-Joomla/English

2016-04-29T18:06:03Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Overview of Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Overview of Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* the concept of '''Content Management Systems''' (or '''CMS''' in short).
* Joomla as a '''CMS'''
* Software and hardware requirements for running '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn about the:

* '''Operating System''' and '''Joomla''' version to be used and
* Overview of the key features that will be demonstrated in the '''Joomla''' series.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
Prerequisites

|| Learner of this tutorial should know how to browse a website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
Content Management System (CMS)

|| Let us first understand what '''Content Management System''' or '''CMS''' is.
* A '''CMS''' is a software used to manage the content of a website.
* It keeps track of every piece of content on the website.
* It allows one to create, modify and remove content from a website without knowing programming skills.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6:'''
Why is '''Joomla''' popular?

|| Why is '''Joomla''' a popular '''CMS'''?
* '''Joomla''' is easy to install and use.
* It supports multiple language websites
* There are many predefined ready-to-use '''Joomla templates''' available online and
* '''Joomla''' has many '''extensions''' that allow additional features to be installed easily.

|-
|| Switch to the browser.

Open http://www.hondashellybeach.co.za/ on the browser.

Open http://www.gsas.harvard.edu/

Open http://www.businesstoday-eg.com/

Open http://www.joy.com.gr/

Open http://www.thisisboo.com/

Open http://community.joomla.org/showcase/sites.html

|| Let us see what kind of websites use '''Joomla''' as the base.

* A corporate website like this.

* An educational one like '''Harvard University''' website

* Websites of media houses, we have '''Business Today''' website here.

* A Greek Ecommerce website like this, Personal websites like these and many more…

'''Joomla''' provides a list of featured websites at the following URL :
http://community.joomla.org/showcase/sites.html

Here you will find the popular '''Joomla''' websites in various categories.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 7:'''
Software requirements for '''Joomla'''

|| To install '''Joomla''', we need:

1. A webserver like '''Apache''' or '''IIS'''

2. A database like '''MySQL''' or '''PostgreSQL'''

3. and '''PHP'''

|-
||
|| At the time of making of this tutorial, '''Joomla 3.4.1''' is the latest version.

The '''Joomla developer community''' keeps releasing newer versions with added features.

It is always recommended to work with the latest stable version that is available.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Prerequisites for '''Joomla 3.4.1'''

|| '''Joomla 3.4.1''' requires the following:

* '''Apache 2.x +''' or '''IIS 7 +'''
* '''MySQL 5.0.4 +''' and
* '''PHP 5.2.4 +'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 9:'''
Software used for the series

|| For this series we have used the following:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 14.04''' and
* '''Apache, MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP 5.5.19'''

|-
||

|| Now, let me list out a few of the key features covered in this series.

|-
|| Point to the various tabs in the Browser

|| For ease of navigation, I have already opened the tutorials in multiple tabs on my browser.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 10:'''
'''Installing Joomla on a localhost'''

|| The tutorial '''Installing Joomla on a localhost''' explains how to -
* install '''Joomla''' on a '''Linux''' machine
* and cross-check the correctness of your installation

Let’s have a look.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 11:'''
'''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla'''

|| '''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla''' tutorial explains -
* the common mistakes that people make during the installation process
* and the steps to uninstall '''Joomla'''

Let’s have a look.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 12:'''
'''Creating Articles in Joomla'''

|| '''Creating Articles in Joomla''' tutorial -
* explains how to create '''articles'''
* and manage '''articles''' using the '''Article Manager''' page

Here is a glimpse.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 13:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Article Options''' tutorial -
* explains various options such as '''Status, Filters, Global Options''', etc.

Let me run through this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 14:'''
Same as narration

|| The next tutorial in this series is '''Formatting Articles in Joomla.'''

In this tutorial, we will learn about formatting options like -
* '''WYSISYG''', also pronounced as '''wiz-ee-wig Article Editor''' in '''Joomla'''
* Styling the '''article''' text
* Inserting lists, page-breaks and '''Read More''' link, etc.

Here is a glimpse of this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 15:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Categories in Joomla''' tutorial will help us to understand
* how to group '''articles''' into different '''categories'''
* and create '''sub-categories''' within '''categories.'''

Let’s have a look at this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 16:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Menus in Joomla''' tutorial will help us to understand -
* how to create '''menus''' and '''sub-menus'''
* and how to link '''articles''' under them.

Let us continue with this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Slide 17:'''
Introduction slides to next tutorials

|| There will be many more tutorials in this series in the future.

Those will reveal us a few advanced features that are available in '''Joomla CMS.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 17:'''
Summary

|| For now, let us summarize.

In this tutorial we have learnt:

* '''Content Management System.'''
* '''Joomla''' as a '''CMS'''
* Software and hardware requirements for the execution of '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 18:'''
Summary - continued
|| We also learnt about the:
* '''OS''' and '''Joomla version''' that would be used for this series.
* We took an overview of the key features those will be demonstrated in the '''Joomla''' series.

|-
||'''Show Slide 19:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 20:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 21:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Overview-of-Joomla/English

2016-04-29T18:02:31Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Overview of Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Overview of Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* the concept of '''Content Management Systems''' (or '''CMS''' in short).
* Joomla as a '''CMS'''
* Software and hardware requirements for running '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn about the:

* '''Operating System''' and '''Joomla''' version to be used and
* Overview of the key features that will be demonstrated in the '''Joomla''' series.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
Prerequisites

|| Learner of this tutorial should know how to browse a website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
Content Management System (CMS)

|| Let us first understand what '''Content Management System''' or '''CMS''' is.
* A '''CMS''' is a software used to manage the content of a website.
* It keeps track of every piece of content on the website.
* It allows one to create, modify and remove content from a website without knowing programming skills.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6:'''
Why is '''Joomla''' popular?

|| Why is '''Joomla''' a popular '''CMS'''?
* '''Joomla''' is easy to install and use.
* It supports multiple language websites
* There are many predefined ready-to-use '''Joomla templates''' available online and
* '''Joomla''' has many '''extensions''' that allow additional features to be installed easily.

|-
|| Switch to the browser.

Open http://www.hondashellybeach.co.za/ on the browser.

Open http://www.gsas.harvard.edu/

Open http://www.businesstoday-eg.com/

Open http://www.joy.com.gr/

Open http://www.thisisboo.com/

Open http://community.joomla.org/showcase/sites.html

|| Let us see what kind of websites use '''Joomla''' as the base.

* A corporate website like this.

* An educational one like '''Harvard University''' website

* Websites of media houses, we have '''Business Today''' website here.

* A Greek Ecommerce website like this, Personal websites like these and many more…

'''Joomla''' provides a list of featured websites at the following URL :
http://community.joomla.org/showcase/sites.html

Here you will find the popular '''Joomla''' websites in various categories.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 7:'''
Software requirements for '''Joomla'''

|| To install '''Joomla''', we need:

1. A webserver like '''Apache''' or '''IIS'''

2. A database like '''MySQL''' or '''PostgreSQL'''

3. and '''PHP'''

|-
||
|| At the time of making of this tutorial, '''Joomla 3.4.1''' is the latest version.

The '''Joomla developer community''' keeps releasing newer versions with added features.

It is always recommended to work with the latest stable version that is available.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Prerequisites for '''Joomla 3.4.1'''

|| '''Joomla 3.4.1''' requires the following:

* '''Apache 2.x +''' or '''IIS 7 +'''
* '''MySQL 5.0.4 +''' and
* '''PHP 5.2.4 +'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 9:'''
Software used for the series

|| For this series we have used the following:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 14.04''' and
* '''Apache, MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP 5.5.19'''

|-
||

|| Now, let me list out a few of the key features covered in this series.

|-
|| Point to the various tabs in the Browser

|| For ease of navigation, I have already opened the tutorials on multiple tabs on my browser.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 10:'''
'''Installing Joomla on a localhost'''

|| The tutorial '''Installing Joomla on a localhost''' explains how to -
* install '''Joomla''' on a '''Linux''' machine
* and cross-check the correctness of your installation

Let’s have a look.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 11:'''
'''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla'''

|| '''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla''' tutorial explains -
* the common mistakes that people make during the installation process
* and the steps to uninstall '''Joomla'''

Let’s have a look.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 12:'''
'''Creating Articles in Joomla'''

|| '''Creating Articles in Joomla''' tutorial -
* explains how to create '''articles'''
* and manage '''articles''' using the '''Article Manager''' page

Here is a glimpse.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 13:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Article Options''' tutorial -
* explains various options such as '''Status, Filters, Global Options''', etc.

Let me run through this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 14:'''
Same as narration

|| The next tutorial in this series is '''Formatting Articles in Joomla.'''

In this tutorial, we will learn about formatting options like -
* '''WYSISYG''', also pronounced as '''wiz-ee-wig Article Editor''' in '''Joomla'''
* Styling the '''article''' text
* Inserting lists, page-breaks and '''Read More''' link, etc.

Here is a glimpse of this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 15:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Categories in Joomla''' tutorial will help us to understand
* how to group '''articles''' into different '''categories'''
* and create '''sub-categories''' within '''categories.'''

Let’s have a look at this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 16:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Menus in Joomla''' tutorial will help us to understand -
* how to create '''menus''' and '''sub-menus'''
* and how to link '''articles''' under them.

Let us continue with this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Slide 17:'''
Introduction slides to next tutorials

|| There will be many more tutorials in this series in the future.

Those will reveal us a few advanced features that are available in '''Joomla CMS.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 17:'''
Summary

|| For now, let us summarize.

In this tutorial we have learnt:

* '''Content Management System.'''
* '''Joomla''' as a '''CMS'''
* Software and hardware requirements for the execution of '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 18:'''
Summary - continued
|| We also learnt about the:
* '''OS''' and '''Joomla version''' that would be used for this series.
* We took an overview of the key features those will be demonstrated in the '''Joomla''' series.

|-
||'''Show Slide 19:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 20:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 21:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Overview-of-Joomla/English

2016-04-29T17:43:29Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with "{| border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Show Slide 1:''' '''Overview of Joomla.''' || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Overview of Joomla.''' |- || '..."

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Overview of Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Overview of Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

* the concept of '''Content Management Systems''' ('''CMS''' in short).
* Joomla as a '''CMS'''
* Software and hardware requirements for running '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn about the:

* '''Operating System''' and '''Joomla''' version to be used and
* Overview of the key features that will be demonstrated in the '''Joomla''' series.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
Prerequisites

|| Learner of this tutorial should know how to browse a website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
Content Management System (CMS)

|| Let us first understand what '''Content Management System''' or '''CMS''' is.
* A '''CMS''' is a software used to manage the content of a website.
* It keeps track of every piece of content on the website.
* It allows one to create, modify and remove content from a website without knowing programming skills.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6:'''
Why is '''Joomla''' popular?

|| Why is '''Joomla''' a popular '''CMS'''?
* '''Joomla''' is easy to install and use.
* It supports multiple language websites
* There are many predefined ready-to-use '''Joomla templates''' available online and
* '''Joomla''' has many '''extensions''' that allow additional features to be installed easily.

|-
|| Switch to the browser.

Open http://www.hondashellybeach.co.za/ on the browser.

Open http://www.gsas.harvard.edu/

Open http://www.businesstoday-eg.com/

Open http://www.joy.com.gr/

Open http://www.thisisboo.com/

Open http://community.joomla.org/showcase/sites.html

|| Let us see what kind of websites use '''Joomla''' as the base.

* A corporate website like this.

* An educational one like '''Harvard University''' website

* Websites of media houses, we have '''Business Today''' website here.

* A Greek Ecommerce website like this, Personal websites like these and many more…

'''Joomla''' provides a list of featured websites at the following URL :
http://community.joomla.org/showcase/sites.html

Here you will find the popular '''Joomla''' websites in various categories.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 7:'''
Software requirements for '''Joomla'''

|| To install '''Joomla''', we need:

1. A webserver like '''Apache''' or '''IIS'''

2. A database like '''MySQL''' or '''PostgreSQL'''

3. and '''PHP'''

|-
||
|| At the time of making of this tutorial, '''Joomla 3.4.1''' is the latest version.

The '''Joomla developer community''' keeps releasing newer versions with added features.

It is always recommended to work with the latest stable version that is available.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 8:'''

Prerequisites for '''Joomla 3.4.1'''

|| '''Joomla 3.4.1''' requires the following:

* '''Apache 2.x +''' or '''IIS 7 +'''
* '''MySQL 5.0.4 +''' and
* '''PHP 5.2.4 +'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 9:'''
Software used for the series

|| For this series we have used the following:

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS 14.04''' and
* '''Apache, MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP 5.5.19'''

|-
||

|| Now, let me list out a few of the key features covered in this series.

|-
|| Point to the various tabs in the Browser

|| For ease of navigation, I have already opened the tutorials on multiple tabs on my browser.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 10:'''
'''Installing Joomla on a localhost'''

|| The tutorial '''Installing Joomla on a localhost''' explains how to -
* install '''Joomla''' on a '''Linux''' machine
* and cross-check the correctness of your installation

Let’s have a look.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 11:'''
'''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla'''

|| '''Common mistakes and uninstalling Joomla''' tutorial explains -
* the common mistakes that people make during the installation process
* and the steps to uninstall '''Joomla'''

Let’s have a look.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 12:'''
'''Creating Articles in Joomla'''

|| '''Creating Articles in Joomla''' tutorial -
* explains how to create '''articles'''
* and manage '''articles''' using the '''Article Manager''' page

Here is a glimpse.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 13:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Article Options''' tutorial -
* explains various options such as '''Status, Filters, Global Options''', etc.

Let me run through this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 14:'''
Same as narration

|| The next tutorial in this series is '''Formatting Articles in Joomla.'''

In this tutorial, we will learn about formatting options like -
* '''WYSISYG''', also pronounced as '''wiz-ee-wig Article Editor''' in '''Joomla'''
* Styling the '''article''' text
* Inserting lists, page-breaks and '''Read More''' link, etc.

Here is a glimpse of this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 15:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Categories in Joomla''' tutorial will help us to understand
* how to group '''articles''' into different '''categories'''
* and create '''sub-categories''' within '''categories.'''

Let’s have a look at this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 16:'''
Same as narration

|| '''Menus in Joomla''' tutorial will help us to understand -
* how to create '''menus''' and '''sub-menus'''
* and how to link '''articles''' under them.

Let us continue with this tutorial.

|-
|| '''Slide 17:'''
Introduction slides to next tutorials

|| There will be many more tutorials in this series in the future.

Those will reveal us a few advanced features that are available in '''Joomla CMS.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 17:'''
Summary

|| For now, let us summarize.

In this tutorial we have learnt:

* '''Content Management System.'''
* '''Joomla''' as a '''CMS'''
* Software and hardware requirements for the execution of '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 18:'''
Summary - continued
|| We also learnt about the:
* '''OS''' and '''Joomla version''' that would be used for this series.
* We took an overview of the key features those will be demonstrated in the '''Joomla''' series.

|-
||'''Show Slide 19:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 20:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 21:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Menus-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-10T05:45:48Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Understanding Menus in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Understanding menus in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Menus''' and their importance in '''Joomla'''.
*'''Menu Manager'''
*And how to create '''menu items'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Create '''sub-menus'''
*Change the default homepage and
*Unpublish '''menu items'''.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*You should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, check the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
|| Open the browser with '''Digital India''' homepage. '''http://localhost/joomla'''

|| Let’s go to our '''Digital India''' webpage to understand more about '''menus.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu'''

|| On the right of the homepage, there is a box which says '''"Main Menu"'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Home'''
|| It currently has only one '''menu, "Home"'''.
By default, this is the only '''menu''' available in '''Joomla'''.

|-
||

|| '''Menus''' are a way to help us navigate the website. Every '''menu''' has a set of '''menu items'''.

Here '''"Home"''' is a '''menu item''', which points to all '''Featured articles.'''

This is the reason why any '''article''' that is marked as '''"featured"''' appears on our homepage.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin A.'''

Click on category link '''Vitamins'''
|| Every '''menu item''' defines a '''URL''' to a '''webpage'''.
A menu item can be set to point to an '''article''', like '''Vitamin A''' here.

Or it can be set to list all '''articles''' under a category, like '''Vitamins'''.

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Menu Manager'''.

Click on '''Menus''' → Hover over '''Menu Manager'''
|| Click on '''Menu Manager''' in the left menu.

Alternately, you may click on '''Menus''' in the menu-bar at the top of the webpage and then on '''Menu Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu'''

|| By default, we have one menu called '''Main Menu'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Main Menu'''.

|| Click on the title '''Main Menu'''. We can see the menu items associated with this menu.

Notice that '''Menu Manager: Menu Items''' has a similar layout as '''Article Manager'''.

|-
||

|| Let’s create a '''menu item''' which will point to our '''article "Benefits of Nutrients"'''.

|-
|| Click on '''New'''.

|| Click on '''New''' button in the toolbar.

|-
|| Highlight '''Menu Item Type'''.

Point to various options.
|| '''Menu Item Type''' field decides the type of page to be shown when we click on that '''menu item'''.

There are various options like '''Single Article, List of articles in a category''' etc.

|-
|| Click on '''Select.'''

|| Click on '''Select''' button next to the '''Menu Item Type'''.

A new window opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Articles → Single Article'''

|| Click on '''Articles''' in the new window.

We can see a list of options under Articles.

Click on '''Single Article'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Select Article'''.

|| Depending on the '''Menu Item Type''', some new parameters may be required.

Since we have selected '''Single Article''', a new field '''Select Article''' has appeared.

|-
|| Click on '''Select.'''

|| This is a mandatory field. Click on '''Select''' button next to this field.

|-
|| Highlight '''Search text box.'''

|| A new window opens with a complete list of '''articles'''.

This window has a search text box which works on the title of the '''article'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''filters.'''

|| It also has filters to narrow down the list of '''articles''' visible in the window.

|-
|| Click on '''Benefits of Nutrients.'''

|| Let’s select the '''article Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||

|| For now, we will keep the default settings in all the other fields in this window.

|-
||Write '''Single Article – Nutrients''' in the ‘Menu Title’ field

|| Right on the top, we have the '''Menu Title''' field.

This is a mandatory field.

Let us type '''Single Article - Nutrients''' as the '''title'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
|| Click on '''Single Article – Nutrients'''

|| Notice the new '''menu item''' link. Click on it.

|-
||

|| We can see the '''article Benefits of Nutrients''' is displayed here.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''.

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top left to go back to the homepage.

|-
|| Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|| Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
|| Click on '''Single Article – Nutrients'''

|| Let's change the '''Single Article-Nutrients menu item''' to '''List of categories'''.

So, click on the '''title Single Article-Nutrients'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Select'''.

Click on '''Articles -> List all Categories'''

|| Click on the '''Select''' next to '''Menu Item Type.'''

In the new pop-up window, click on '''Articles''' and then on '''List All Categories'''.

|-
||

|| We are back to the '''menu manager''' window.

|-
|| Highlight '''Select a Top Level Category'''.

|| Notice now that a new field appears.

It requires us to select the '''Top Level Category'''.

This is the '''category''' whose '''subcategories''' will be listed under this '''menu item'''.

By default, it is '''Root.'''

|-
||

|| We will leave all the other fields as they are.

|-
||Select '''Single Article - Nutrients'''. Delete it.
Type '''Multiple Categories.'''

||But we will change the '''menu title''' to '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''.

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
|| Click on '''Multiple Categories'''.

||In the '''Main Menu''', click on '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Nutrients''' and '''Food Sources.'''

Highlight the numbers.

||Notice that two of our categories '''Nutrients''' and '''Food Sources''' are shown on the top left of the webpage.

The numbers next to the category indicate the number of articles under that category.

Also, notice that the category '''Uncategorized''' is not shown here.

That is because it has neither any article nor any subcategory assigned to it.

|-
|| Click on '''Nutrients'''.

Scroll down to see the article and sub-categories.

||Click on '''Nutrients''' link.

The article '''Benefits of Nutrients''' and subcategories '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' are shown up.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India.'''

||Click on '''Digital India''' link at the top left to go back to the homepage

|-
||'''Slide''':

Menu Tree

||A '''menu item''' can have '''sub-menus''', similar to how a '''category''' can have '''sub-categories'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||

||Let's create a '''submenu''' under '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
||Click on '''New'''.

||On the '''Menu Items''' page, click on '''New''' button.

|-
||Click on '''Select → Articles → Category List'''

||Click the '''Select''' button next to '''Menu Item Type''' and then on '''Articles'''.

Select '''Category List'''. This will display a list of '''articles''' in a '''category'''.

|-
||
||A new field '''Choose a Category''' appears.

|-
||Select '''Nutrients''' in the drop-down '''Choose a Category'''.

||By default, the selected category is '''Uncategorised'''.

Let's select '''Nutrients''' in the dropdown list.

|-
||Highlight drop-down '''Parent Item.'''

Select '''All Categories Menu'''.

||On the right, there is a field to select the '''parent item'''.
Click on it.

Then select the option '''Multiple Categories.'''

|-
||Type '''Nutrient Articles''' in Menu title text box.

||Lastly let's give this '''menu''' a '''title''' - we will call it '''Nutrient Articles'''.

|-
||Click on '''Save'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||
||Let’s have a look at the all the changes on the '''Digital India webpage'''.

|-
||Refresh the '''Digital India webpage.'''

||Let’s refresh the '''webpage''' and click on '''Multiple categories menu item'''.

|-
||Point to '''sub-menu item Nutrient Articles'''

||Immediately, we see the '''sub-menu item Nutrient Articles''' displayed below it.

Click on it.

|-
||Point to both the table and then to the '''sub-categories'''

||This page lists all the '''articles''' under this '''category''' in a tabular format.

The '''sub-categories'''-
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' are listed separately.
<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Highlight the URL for this webpage

||Now, let’s have a look at the '''title''' that is displayed for this '''web-page'''.

It says '''Nutrient Articles''', as you can see here.

|-
||

||How can we change this '''title''' to a different one?

We can do this through the '''menu settings'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|| Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Page Display.'''

||Let’s click on the '''tab Page Display'''.

|-
||

||Note that here all the page settings are optional.

|-
||

||In '''Browser Page Title''' field, type '''Nutrient Category'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Then click on '''Save and Close''' button.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

||Switch to the '''Digital India webpage''' and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice the browser '''title''' now.

It says '''Nutrient Category.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India.'''

||Click on the '''Digital India''' link to go back to the '''homepage'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Let us switch back to the '''Menu Manager'''.

|-
||Point to '''Home''' button.

||Notice the '''Home''' button in the top toolbar.

|-
||

||This makes the '''page''' associated with the selected '''menu''' as the website '''homepage'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Home''' menu.

||By default, the '''menu item Home''' is set as the default '''homepage'''.

|-
||Hover cursor over '''Home''' column button.

||We can verify this by hovering the cursor on the '''Home''' column button.

The tool tip says '''“Default”.'''

|-
||

||Let's make the '''Nutrient Articles submenu''' as the default '''homepage'''.

|-
||Select the check-box to the left of '''Nutrient Articles → Home.'''

||Click on the check-box to the left of the title and click on '''Home''' button in the toolbar.

|-
||Point to yellow star.

||Notice that the yellow star now appears next to this '''submenu'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the homepage has changed.

|-
||Show Slide 6:

Importance of Menus

||'''Menus''' are important in '''Joomla''' because
*Content can be displayed only via menus and
*Every website must have at least one published menu.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Select the check-box. Click '''Unpublish'''.

Highlight the error.

||Select the check-box to the left of '''Nutrient Articles submenu.'''

Click on the '''Unpublish''' button on the top toolbar.

The system shows an error '''Can't unpublish default home.'''

|-
||

||This means that the menu associated with the homepage cannot be unpublished.

|-
||Select the check-box.

||However, we can unpublish the parent menu.

Click on the check-box to the left of '''Multiple Categories'''

|-
||Click '''Unpublish.'''

||Click on '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar.

|-
||Highlight the '''Unpublish'''

||Unpublishing a menu also un-publishes all its submenus.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage

||Let's go to the '''Digital India''' webpage and check what we have done.

|-
||Press '''F5'''

||Refresh the '''homepage'''.

|-
||Highlight the error.
|| Notice that the homepage now shows an error '''The requested page cannot be found.'''

This is because the default home menu '''Nutrient Articles''' also got unpublished.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager'''

||Let's go back to the '''Menu Manager'''.

|-
||Click on the status icon.

||Publish the '''Multiple Categories''' by clicking on the '''Status''' icon.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage - Press '''F5.'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India webpage''' and refresh it.

|-
||

||Note that the error on the '''homepage''' has now gone.

|-
||
||We can see the '''Nutrient Articles''' being displayed.

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 7:

Summary: Same as narration
||In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Menus''' and their importance in '''Joomla'''.
*'''Menu Manager'''
*And how to create '''menu items'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 8:

Same as narration
||We also learnt how to:
*Create '''sub-menus'''
*Change the default homepage and
*Unpublish '''menu items'''.

|-
||Slide 9 & 10:

Assignment 1:
||Here are 2 assignments for you:

*Create a new '''menu item Category Blogs and Lists''' under the '''Main Menu'''.
*Create 2 '''submenus''' under this '''menu item.'''
Hint: Use the guidelines given in the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Click on the newly created menu items and understand the difference between the 2 menu types.

|-
||Assignment 2:

||
*Delete the menu item '''Nutrient Articles'''
*See if you can restore it back.
Hint: Use the Search Tools filter.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.''' More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Formatting-article-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-08T11:09:35Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
Formatting Articles in Joomla.
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Basic Formatting of Articles in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Article''' editor in '''Joomla.'''
*Basic formatting for an '''article'''
*And styling an '''article''' text

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Insert '''lists'''
*Insert a '''page break''' and
*Insert '''Read More''' link in articles.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*You should know how to create '''articles''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, check the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6'''
Prior Knowledge

|| Earlier, we learnt to create, edit, delete and copy an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''.
Now, let’s learn how to format '''articles.'''

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''
|| Click on '''Article Manager. '''
Here are the articles we created earlier:
*'''“Benefits of Sodium”''' and
*'''“Vitamin A”'''

|-
||

|| Let us view them on the '''Digital India''' webpage.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top right of the page.

|-
||

|| We can see both our '''articles''' here.

|-
|| Click on “Benefits of Sodium”
|| Click on '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| We can see the '''article''' is not formatted.

|-
|| Click on the '''admin panel''' webpage in the browser.

Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

|| Let’s go back to the '''Article Manager.'''

Click on the article title '''“Benefits of Sodium”.'''

|-
|| Point to the editor

|| The editor in which we type the text of the '''article''', is called a '''WYSIWYG editor.'''

|-
|| While editing, this text can appear on the screen:
'''WYSIWYG : 'What You See Is What You Get'.'''

|| '''WYSIWYG''' is the abbreviation of ''''What You See Is What You Get'.'''

|-
||

|| It means the '''article''' looks the same in the web page as seen in the editing window.

|-
|| Point to the menu bar in the editor

|| Look at the menu bar of the editor now.

|-
|| Point to some options in the first row.

Now click on any 2 for demo

|| The first row has drop-down menus, which have various formatting options.

You can see the sub-options when you click on them.

|-
|| Point to some options in the 2nd row.

|| The second row has sets of formatting options.

|-
|| Point to each icon in the first set

|| So here, we see a set of text enhancement options like

'''Bold, Italics, Underline''' and '''Strikethrough. '''

|-
|| Point to each icon in the second set

|| Next, we see the options to align the text to the '''left, centre, right''' and '''justify'''.

|-
||

|| These work as in any other text editor.

|-
|| Point to '''Paragraph''' button

|| After the alignment options, we can see a button named '''Paragraph.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Paragraph'''

|| When we click on it, we can see various options like '''Heading 1, Heading 2''', etc.

These are pre-set options provided by '''Joomla''' for formatting purposes.

|-
||'''Show Slide 7''': Headings in Joomla

|| '''Headings''' are very useful in making text easier to read on the screen.

'''Headings''' also define the hierarchy of importance.

|-
|| Highlight '''Heading 1'''
Highlight '''Heading 6'''

|| '''Heading 1''' defines the most important heading and '''Heading 6''' is the least important.

|-
|| Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage.

Highlight '''Home.'''

|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage.

Here, the text '''Home''' is in '''Heading 1.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Benefits of Sodium'''

|| The title of an '''article''' in '''Joomla''' is in '''Heading 2.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu, Login Form'''

|| Other headings, like '''Main Menu''' and '''Login Form''' are in '''Heading 3'''.

|-
||

|| Notice that the font size keeps decreasing with levels of '''headings.'''

|-
|| Switch back to '''Edit Article''' webpage

|| Switch to the '''Edit Article webpage.'''

|-
||

|| Let us add one section on food sources of '''Sodium.'''

|-
|| Point the cursor to the end of the '''article'''>> Press '''Enter'''.

|| At the end of the '''article''' text, click '''Enter''' to begin a new paragraph.

|-
|| Type: '''Food Sources''':
Salt
Processed Food
Canned Food

|| Type '''Food Sources:''' as the heading.

We will type 3 food sources here –
'''Salt, Processed Food''' and '''Canned Food'''.

|-
|| Select '''Food Sources''' >> Click on '''Paragraph''' button>> Select '''Heading 4'''

|| Select the text '''Food Sources:''' and in the Paragraph drop-down, select '''Heading 4'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Save'''

|| Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Switch to the webpage and press '''F5'''

|| Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh the page.

|-
||Highlight '''Food Sources'''

|| Notice that the text '''Food Sources''' appears in bold.

|-
|| Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage

||Go back to '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
|| Type: '''Let’s look at some sources of sodium'''

||Next to the heading '''Food Sources''', add the text -
'''Let’s look at some food sources of sodium.'''

|-
|| Point to the added text

||Here, we have added the text in the same paragraph.

The newly added text becomes part of the heading and is formatted as '''Heading 4.'''

|-
||

||Please note that the:

Header formatting applies to the entire paragraph and not to particular words.

|-
|| Press '''Enter'''.

||To separate this line from the heading, press '''Enter''' before the newly added text.

|-
||Select the text >> Click on '''Paragraph''' button→ '''Paragraph'''

||Then select the text and from the '''Paragraph''' drop-down select the option '''Paragraph'''.

The text is no longer in '''Heading 4''' format.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Place the cursor at the top of the page >>
Type '''Chemical Symbol of Sodium is Na'''

||Let me add a text line at the top of the page:
'''“Chemical Symbol of Sodium is Na.”'''

|-
||Select the new text line. Click on '''Paragraph → Pre'''.

||Select the text line and then from the '''Paragraph''' drop-down button select '''Pre'''.

|-
||Highlight the text line

||The '''Pre''' option is for preformatted text.

Preformatted text is displayed in fixed wide font, and preserves both spaces and line breaks.

|-
||Click on '''Save'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and press '''F5'''

||Go to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

Notice that the newly added text appears in a grey box.

It also appears in a different font and style.

|-
||Highlight the new text line

||'''Pre''' style is usually used for text that needs to stand out in an '''article'''.

This could be poetic stanza, computer code, quotes etc.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article'''.

||Switch to the '''Edit Article''' webpage again.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Point to the list options.

||Next, we have the '''bulleted list''' and '''numbered list''' options.

Let us see how to use them.

|-
||Select the last 3 lines

||Select the last 3 line items in the '''article''' text.

|-
||Click on bulleted list >> click on '''Save''' button

||Now click on '''bullet list''' icon and then click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Refresh the '''Homepage'''

||Refresh the '''Website''' to see the bulleted list in the '''article Benefits of Sodium'''.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Click on '''Edit Article''' webpage.

||Come back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Point the 3rd row icons one by one.

||The third row has some advanced formatting options like:

*Decrease and increase '''indent'''
*'''Un-do''' and '''Redo'''
*'''Insert links, images, tables''', etc.
*'''Superscript, subscript and special characters'''

You can try these on your own and see how they work.

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

|-
||

||Let’s look at our '''article''' again.

|-
||Point to the article sections '''health benefits of sodium''' and '''sources of sodium'''

||Here we have 2 sections:
*Text about introduction of sodium and its benefits and
*'''Food Sources.'''

Let’s separate these two sections using a horizontal line.

|-
||Point the cursor before '''Sources of Sodium''' text.

Click on '''Horizontal Line''' icon.

||Keep the cursor before the text '''Food Sources'''.

Now click on the '''Horizontal Line''' icon in the formatting menu bar.

This will insert a horizontal line.

|-
||Click on Save button >> Switch to the webpage and press F5

||'''Save''' and refresh the page.

We can see the changes in the '''article “Benefits of Sodium”'''.

|-
||

||Instead of inserting a horizontal line, why not put these 2 sections in 2 different pages?

Let’s try doing that.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage.

||Go back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Click on the horizontal line >> Press '''Backspace''' key.

||First we will remove the horizontal line.

So click on it and then press the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.

|-
||Place the cursor at the point

||Now place the cursor at the point where we want to insert the '''Page Break'''.

|-
||Scroll down >> Locate '''Page Break''' button >> Click on it

||Scroll down and locate the '''Page Break''' button at the bottom of the editor window.

Click on it.

|-
||

||It will open an '''Insert Pagebreak''' dialog box.

|-
||'''Page Title: Sources'''

'''Table of Contents: Sources of Sodium'''

||Enter '''Sources''' as '''Page Title''' and '''Food Sources of Sodium''' as '''Table of Contents Alias'''.

|-
||Click on '''Insert Page Break''' button >> Point to the zig-zag line between the two sections.

||Click on '''Insert Page Break''' button.

You will see a zig-zag line between the two sections.

|-
||Click on '''Save''' button >> Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and press '''F5'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Page 1 of 2.'''

||This page says '''Page 1 of 2'''.
|-
||Highlight '''Prev''' and '''Next.'''

||There are '''Prev''' and '''Next''' buttons below the '''article''' text.

|-
||Highlight block on the right.

||A new block has appeared on the right.

It helps us navigate to the various pages of the particular '''article'''.

|-
||Point to the Title in the block on the right

||The title of the 2nd page is the '''Table of Contents Alias''' we typed earlier…..

i.e. '''Food Sources of Sodium'''

|-
||Click on '''Next''' button.

||Click on '''Next''' button.

|-
||Highlight '''Page 2 of 2'''.

||Now, the page says '''Page 2 of 2'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Sources''' in '''Benefits of sodium - Sources'''

||Notice the '''Page Title''' that we typed in the '''Insert Pagebreak''' field.

|-
||Continue the highlight and point to the Title

||It has been appended to the title of the '''article'''.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, let’s click on the '''Digital India''' link to go back to our website’s '''Homepage'''.

|-
||Scroll down to show the '''article Benefits of Sodium.'''

||Scroll down to see the '''article Benefits of Sodium'''.

Notice here that the full '''article''' text is displayed on the '''Homepage'''.

|-
||

||Let us explore how to add a '''Read More''' option here.

This option will show only a part of the '''article''' on the '''Homepage'''.

|-
||On the '''Homepage''', point to the text:
'''Daily consumption of…….. '''

||For this '''article''', I’ll insert a '''Read More''' link before the text:
Daily consumption of sodium, however, depends on a number of factors.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Place the cursor before '''Daily consumption of …..'''

||Place the cursor at the point where you want to insert the '''Read More''' link.

|-
||Click on '''Read More''' button.

||Now, at the bottom, click on the '''Read More''' button next to the '''Page Break''' button.

|-
||Click on '''Save''' button.

||Scroll up and click on the '''Save''' button.

Switch to the webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Read More: Benefits of sodium'''

||We can see the '''Read More''' link below the '''article''' text here.

|-
||Click on '''Read More: Benefits of sodium'''

||When we click on it, the '''article Benefits of Sodium''' opens.

And it will display the full '''article''' in 2 pages, just as we had set it earlier.

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarise.

|-
||Switch to Slide 8:

'''Summary: Same as narration'''

||In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Article''' editor in '''Joomla'''.
*Basic formatting of an '''article'''
*Styling an '''article''' text

|-
||Switch to Slide 9:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:

*Insert '''Lists'''
*Insert '''Page Break''' and
*Insert '''Read More''' in '''articles'''.

|-
||Slide 10 & 11:

Assignment

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Modify the 4 health benefits of '''sodium''' as a numbered list.
*Center align the heading '''Food Sources'''.
*Remove the '''Read More''' link and put it just before '''Food Sources'''
*Add the text '''Melting Point 97.72 °C''' as pre-formatted text along with the current pre-formatted text.
Hint: Use special characters to get the text '''°C''' in the '''article'''.
*Save the '''article.'''
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Menus-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-08T10:58:27Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Understanding Menus in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Understanding menus in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Menus''' and their importance in '''Joomla'''.
*'''Menu Manager'''
*And how to create '''menu items'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Create '''sub-menus'''
*Change the default homepage and
*Unpublish '''menu items'''.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*You should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, pls refer to the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
|| Open the browser with '''Digital India''' homepage. '''http://localhost/joomla'''

|| Let’s go to our '''Digital India''' webpage to understand more about '''menus.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu'''

|| On the right of the homepage, there is a box which says '''"Main Menu"'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Home'''
|| It currently has only one '''menu, "Home"'''.
By default, this is the only '''menu''' available in '''Joomla'''.

|-
||

|| '''Menus''' are a way to help us navigate the website. Every '''menu''' has a set of '''menu items'''.
Here '''"Home"''' is a '''menu item''', which points to all '''Featured articles.'''
This is the reason why any '''article''' that is marked as '''"featured"''' appears on our homepage.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin A.'''

Click on category link '''Vitamins'''
|| Every '''menu item''' defines a '''URL''' to a '''webpage'''.
A menu item can be set to point to an '''article''', like '''Vitamin A''' here.
Or it can be set to list all '''articles''' under a category, like '''Vitamins'''.

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Menu Manager'''.

Click on '''Menus''' → Hover over '''Menu Manager'''
|| Click on '''Menu Manager''' in the left menu.

Alternately, you may click on '''Menus''' in the menu-bar at the top of the webpage and then on '''Menu Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu'''

|| By default, we have one menu called '''Main Menu'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Main Menu'''.

|| Click on the title '''Main Menu'''. We can see the menu items associated with this menu.

Notice that '''Menu Manager: Menu Items''' has a similar layout as '''Article Manager'''.

|-
||

|| Let’s create a '''menu item''' which will point to our '''article "Nutrients"'''.

|-
|| Click on '''New'''.

|| Click on '''New''' button in the toolbar.

|-
|| Highlight '''Menu Item Type'''.

Point to various options.
|| '''Menu Item Type''' field decides the type of page to be shown when we click on that '''menu item'''.

There are various options like '''Single Article, List of articles in a category''' etc.

|-
|| Click on '''Select.'''

|| Click on '''Select''' button next to the '''Menu Item Type'''.

A new window opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Articles → Single Article'''

|| Click on '''Articles''' in the new window.

We can see a list of options under Articles.

Click on '''Single Article'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Select Article'''.

|| Depending on the '''Menu Item Type''', some new parameters may be required.

Since we have selected '''Single Article''', a new field '''Select Article''' has appeared.

|-
|| Click on '''Select.'''

|| This is a mandatory field. Click on '''Select''' button next to this field.

|-
|| Highlight '''Search text box.'''

|| A new window opens with a complete list of '''articles'''.

This window has a search text box which works on the title of the '''article'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''filters.'''

|| It also has filters to narrow down the list of '''articles''' visible in the window.

|-
|| Click on '''Nutrients.'''

|| Let’s select the '''article Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||

|| For now, we will keep the default settings in all the other fields in this window.

|-
||Write '''Single Article – Nutrients''' in the ‘Menu Title’ field

|| Right on the top, we have the '''Menu Title''' field.

This is a mandatory field.

Let us type '''Single Article - Nutrients''' as the '''title'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
|| Click on '''Single Article – Nutrients'''

|| Notice the new '''menu item''' link. Click on it.

|-
||

|| We can see the '''article Benefits of Nutrients''' is displayed here.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''.

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top left to go back to the homepage.

|-
|| Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|| Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
|| Click on '''Single Article – Nutrients'''

|| Let's change the '''Single Article-Nutrients menu item''' to '''List of categories'''.

So, click on the '''title Single Article-Nutrients'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Select'''.

Click on '''Articles -> List all Categories'''

|| Click on the '''Select''' next to '''Menu Item Type.'''

In the new pop-up window, click on '''Articles''' and then on '''List All Categories'''.

|-
||

|| We are back to the '''menu manager''' window.

|-
|| Highlight '''Select a Top Level Category'''.

|| Notice now that a new field appears.

It requires us to select the '''Top Level Category'''.

This is the '''category''' whose '''subcategories''' will be listed under this '''menu item'''.

By default, it is '''Root.'''

|-
||

|| We will leave all the other fields as they are.

|-
||Select '''Single Article - Nutrients'''. Delete it.
Type '''Multiple Categories.'''

||But we will change the '''menu title''' to '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''.

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
|| Click on '''Multiple Categories'''.

||In the '''Main Menu''', click on '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Nutrients''' and '''Food Sources.'''

Highlight the numbers.

||Notice that two of our categories '''Nutrients''' and '''Food Sources''' are shown on the top left of the webpage.

The numbers next to the category indicate the number of articles under that category.

Also, notice that the category '''Uncategorized''' is not shown here.

That is because it has neither any article nor any subcategory assigned to it.

|-
|| Click on '''Nutrients'''.

Scroll down to see the article and sub-categories.

||Click on '''Nutrients''' link.

The article '''Benefits of Nutrients''' and subcategories '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' are shown up.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India.'''

||Click on '''Digital India''' link at the top left to go back to the homepage

|-
||'''Slide''':

Menu Tree

||A '''menu item''' can have '''sub-menus''', similar to how a '''category''' can have '''sub-categories'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||

||Let's create a '''submenu''' under '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
||Click on '''New'''.

||On the '''Menu Items''' page, click on '''New''' button.

|-
||Click on '''Select → Articles → Category List'''

||Click the '''Select''' button next to '''Menu Item Type''' and then on '''Articles'''.

Select '''Category List'''. This will display a list of '''articles''' in a '''category'''.

|-
||
||A new field '''Choose a Category''' appears.

|-
||Select '''Nutrients''' in the drop-down '''Choose a Category'''.

||By default, the selected category is '''Uncategorised'''.

Let's select '''Nutrients''' in the dropdown list.

|-
||Highlight drop-down '''Parent Item.'''

Select '''All Categories Menu'''.

||On the right, there is a field to select the '''parent item'''.
Click on it.

Then select the option '''Multiple Categories.'''

|-
||Type '''Nutrient Articles''' in Menu title text box.

||Lastly let's give this '''menu''' a '''title''' - we will call it '''Nutrient Articles'''.

|-
||Click on '''Save'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||
||Let’s have a look at the all the changes on the '''Digital India webpage'''.

|-
||Refresh the '''Digital India webpage.'''

||Let’s refresh the '''webpage''' and click on '''Multiple categories menu item'''.

|-
||Point to '''sub-menu item Nutrient Articles'''

||Immediately, we see the '''sub-menu item Nutrient Articles''' displayed below it.

Click on it.

|-
||Point to both the table and then to the '''sub-categories'''

||This page lists all the '''articles''' under this '''category''' in a tabular format.

The '''sub-categories'''-
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' are listed separately.
<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Highlight the URL for this webpage

||Now, let’s have a look at the '''title''' that is displayed for this '''web-page'''.

It says '''Nutrient Articles''', as you can see here.

|-
||

||How can we change this '''title''' to a different one?

We can do this through the '''menu settings'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|| Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Page Display.'''

||Let’s click on the '''tab Page Display'''.

|-
||

||Note that here all the page settings are optional.

|-
||

||In '''Browser Page Title''' field, type '''Nutrient Category'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Then click on '''Save and Close''' button.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

||Switch to the '''Digital India webpage''' and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice the browser '''title''' now.

It says '''Nutrient Category.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India.'''

||Click on the '''Digital India''' link to go back to the '''homepage'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Let us switch back to the '''Menu Manager'''.

|-
||Point to '''Home''' button.

||Notice the '''Home''' button in the top toolbar.

|-
||

||This makes the '''page''' associated with the selected '''menu''' as the website '''homepage'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Home''' menu.

||By default, the '''menu item Home''' is set as the default '''homepage'''.

|-
||Hover cursor over '''Home''' column button.

||We can verify this by hovering the cursor on the '''Home''' column button.

The tool tip says '''“Default”.'''

|-
||

||Let's make the '''Nutrient Articles submenu''' as the default '''homepage'''.

|-
||Select the check-box to the left of '''Nutrient Articles → Home.'''

||Click on the check-box to the left of the title and click on '''Home''' button in the toolbar.

|-
||Point to yellow star.

||Notice that the yellow star now appears next to this '''submenu'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the homepage has changed.

|-
||Show Slide 6:

Importance of Menus

||'''Menus''' are important in '''Joomla''' because
*Content can be displayed only via menus and
*Every website must have at least one published menu.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Select the check-box. Click '''Unpublish'''.

Highlight the error.

||Select the check-box to the left of '''Nutrient Articles submenu.'''

Click on the '''Unpublish''' button on the top toolbar.

The system shows an error '''Can't unpublish default home.'''

|-
||

||This means that the menu associated with the homepage cannot be unpublished.

|-
||Select the check-box.

||However, we can unpublish the parent menu.

Click on the check-box to the left of '''Multiple Categories'''

|-
||Click '''Unpublish.'''

||Click on '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar.

|-
||Highlight the '''Unpublish'''

||Unpublishing a menu also un-publishes all its submenus.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage

||Let's go to the '''Digital India''' webpage and check what we have done.

|-
||Press '''F5'''

||Refresh the '''homepage'''.

|-
||Highlight the error.
|| Notice that the homepage now shows an error '''The requested page cannot be found.'''

This is because the default home menu '''Nutrient Articles''' also got unpublished.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager'''

||Let's go back to the '''Menu Manager'''.

|-
||Click on the status icon.

||Publish the '''Multiple Categories''' by clicking on the '''Status''' icon.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage - Press '''F5.'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India webpage''' and refresh it.

|-
||

||Note that the error on the '''homepage''' has now gone.

|-
||
||We can see the '''Nutrient Articles''' being displayed.

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 7:

Summary: Same as narration
||In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Menus''' and their importance in '''Joomla'''.
*'''Menu Manager'''
*And how to create '''menu items'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 8:

Same as narration
||We also learnt how to:
*Create '''sub-menus'''
*Change the default homepage and
*Unpublish '''menu items'''.

|-
||Slide 9 & 10:

Assignment 1:
||Here are 2 assignments for you:

*Create a new '''menu item Category Blogs and Lists''' under the '''Main Menu'''.
*Create 2 '''submenus''' under this '''menu item.'''
Hint: Use the guidelines given in the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Click on the newly created menu items and understand the difference between the 2 menu types.

|-
||Assignment 2:

||
*Delete the menu item '''Nutrient Articles'''
*See if you can restore it back.
Hint: Use the Search Tools filter.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.''' More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Menus-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-08T10:44:33Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Understanding Menus in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Understanding menus in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Menus''' and their importance in '''Joomla'''.
*'''Menu Manager'''
*And how to create '''menu items'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Create '''sub-menus'''
*Change the default homepage and
*Unpublish '''menu items'''.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*You should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, pls refer to the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
|| Open the browser with '''Digital India''' homepage. '''http://localhost/joomla'''

|| Let’s go to our '''Digital India''' webpage to understand more about '''menus.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu'''

|| On the right of the homepage, there is a box which says '''"Main Menu"'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Home'''
|| It currently has only one '''menu, "Home"'''.
By default, this is the only '''menu''' available in '''Joomla'''.

|-
||

|| '''Menus''' are a way to help us navigate the website. Every '''menu''' has a set of '''menu items'''.
Here '''"Home"''' is a '''menu item''', which points to all '''Featured articles.'''
This is the reason why any '''article''' that is marked as '''"featured"''' appears on our homepage.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin A.'''

Click on category link '''Vitamins'''
|| Every '''menu item''' defines a '''URL''' to a '''webpage'''.
A menu item can be set to point to an '''article''', like '''Vitamin A''' here.
Or it can be set to list all '''articles''' under a category, like '''Vitamins'''.

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Menu Manager'''.

Click on '''Menus''' → Hover over '''Menu Manager'''
|| Click on '''Menu Manager''' in the left menu.

Alternately, you may click on '''Menus''' in the menu-bar at the top of the webpage and then on '''Menu Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu'''

|| By default, we have one menu called '''Main Menu'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Main Menu'''.

|| Click on the title '''Main Menu'''. We can see the menu items associated with this menu.

Notice that '''Menu Manager: Menu Items''' has a similar layout as '''Article Manager'''.

|-
||

|| Let’s create a '''menu item''' which will point to our '''article "Nutrients"'''.

|-
|| Click on '''New'''.

|| Click on '''New''' button in the toolbar.

|-
|| Highlight '''Menu Item Type'''.

Point to various options.
|| '''Menu Item Type''' field decides the type of page to be shown when we click on that '''menu item'''.

There are various options like '''Single Article, List of articles in a category''' etc.

|-
|| Click on '''Select.'''

|| Click on '''Select''' button next to the '''Menu Item Type'''.

A new window opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Articles → Single Article'''

|| Click on '''Articles''' in the new window.

We can see a list of options under Articles.

Click on '''Single Article'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Select Article'''.

|| Depending on '''Menu Item Type''', some new parameters may be required.

Since we have selected '''Single Article''', a new field '''Select Article''' has appeared.

|-
|| Click on '''Select.'''

|| This is a mandatory field. Click on '''Select''' button next to this field.

|-
|| Highlight '''Search text box.'''

|| A new window opens with a complete list of '''articles'''.

This window has a search text box which works on the title of the '''article'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''filters.'''

|| It also has filters to narrow down the list of '''articles''' visible in the window.

|-
|| Click on '''Nutrients.'''

|| Let’s select the '''article Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||

|| For now, we will keep the default settings in all the other fields in this window.

|-
||Write '''Single Article – Nutrients''' in the ‘Menu Title’ field

|| Right on the top, we have the '''Menu Title''' field.

This is a mandatory field.

Let us type '''Single Article - Nutrients''' as the '''title'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
|| Click on '''Single Article – Nutrients'''

|| Notice the new '''menu item''' link. Click on it.

|-
||

|| We can see the '''article Benefits of Nutrients''' is displayed here.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''.

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top left to go back to the homepage.

|-
|| Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|| Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
|| Click on '''Single Article – Nutrients'''

|| Let's change the '''Single Article-Nutrients menu item''' to '''List of categories'''.

So, click on the '''title Single Article-Nutrients'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Select'''.

Click on '''Articles -> List all Categories'''

|| Click on '''Select''' next to '''Menu Item Type.'''

In the new pop-up window, click on '''Articles''' and then on '''List All Categories'''.

|-
||

|| We are back to the '''menu manager''' window.

|-
|| Highlight '''Select a Top Level Category'''.

|| Notice now that a new field appears.

It requires us to select the '''Top Level Category'''.

This is the '''category''' whose '''subcategories''' will be listed under this '''menu item'''.

By default, it is '''Root.'''

|-
||

|| We will leave all the other fields as they are.

|-
||Select '''Single Article - Nutrients'''. Delete it.
Type '''Multiple Categories.'''

||But we will change the '''menu title''' to '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''.

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
|| Click on '''Multiple Categories'''.

||In the '''Main Menu''', click on '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Nutrients''' and '''Food Sources.'''

Highlight the numbers.

||Notice that two of our categories '''Nutrients''' and '''Food Sources''' are shown on the top left of the webpage.

The numbers next to the category indicate the number of articles under that category.

Also, notice that the category '''Uncategorized''' is not shown here.

That is because it has neither any article nor any subcategory assigned to it.

|-
|| Click on '''Nutrients'''.

Scroll down to see the article and sub-categories.

||Click on '''Nutrients''' link.

The article '''Benefits of Nutrients''' and subcategories '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' are shown here.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India.'''

||Click on '''Digital India''' link at the top left to go back to the homepage

|-
||'''Slide''':

Menu Tree

||A '''menu item''' can have '''sub-menus''', similar to how a '''category''' can have '''sub-categories'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||

||Let's create a '''submenu''' under '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
||Click on '''New'''.

||On the '''Menu Items''' page, click on '''New''' button.

|-
||Click on '''Select → Articles → Category List'''

||Click the '''Select''' button next to '''Menu Item Type''' and then on '''Articles'''.

Select '''Category List'''. This will display a list of '''articles''' in a '''category'''.

|-
||
||A new field '''Choose a Category''' appears.

|-
||Select '''Nutrients''' in the drop-down '''Choose a Category'''.

||By default, the selected category is '''Uncategorised'''.

Let's select '''Nutrients''' in the dropdown list.

|-
||Highlight drop-down '''Parent Item.'''

Select '''All Categories Menu'''.

||On the right, there is a field to select the '''parent item'''.
Click on it.

Then select the option '''Multiple Categories.'''

|-
||Type '''Nutrient Articles''' in Menu title text box.

||Lastly let's give this '''menu''' a '''title''' - we will call it '''Nutrient Articles'''.

|-
||Click on '''Save'''

||And click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||
||Let’s have a look at the all the changes on the '''Digital India webpage'''.

|-
||Refresh the '''Digital India webpage.'''

||Let’s refresh the '''webpage''' and click on '''Multiple categories menu item'''.

|-
||Point to '''sub-menu item Nutrient Articles'''

||Immediately, we see the '''sub-menu item Nutrient Articles''' displayed below it.

Click on it.

|-
||Point to both the table and then to the '''sub-categories'''

||This page lists all the '''articles''' under this '''category''' in a tabular format.

The '''sub-categories'''-
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' are listed separately.
<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Highlight the URL for this webpage

||Now, let’s have a look at the '''title''' that is displayed for this '''web-page'''.

It says '''Nutrient Articles''', as you can see here.

|-
||

||How can we change this '''title''' to a different one?

We can do this through the '''menu settings'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|| Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Page Display.'''

||Let’s click on the '''tab Page Display'''.

|-
||

||Note that here all the page settings are optional.

|-
||

||In '''Browser Page Title''' field, type '''Nutrient Category'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Then click on '''Save and Close''' button.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

||Switch to the '''Digital India webpage''' and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice the browser '''title''' now.

It says '''Nutrient Category.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India.'''

||Click on the '''Digital India''' link to go back to the '''homepage'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Let us switch back to the '''Menu Manager'''.

|-
||Point to '''Home''' button.

||Notice the '''Home''' button in the top toolbar.

|-
||

||This makes the '''page''' associated with the selected '''menu''' as the website '''homepage'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Home''' menu.

||By default, the '''menu item Home''' is set as the default '''homepage'''.

|-
||Hover cursor over '''Home''' column button.

||We can verify this by hovering the cursor on the '''Home''' column button.

The tool tip says '''“Default”.'''

|-
||

||Let's make the '''Nutrient Articles submenu''' as our default '''homepage'''.

|-
||Select the check-box to the left of '''Nutrient Articles → Home.'''

||Click on the check-box to the left of the title and click on '''Home''' button in the toolbar.

|-
||Point to yellow star.

||Notice that the yellow star now appears next to this '''submenu'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the homepage has changed.

|-
||Show Slide 6:

Importance of Menus

||'''Menus''' are important in '''Joomla''' because
*Content can be displayed only via menus and
*Every website must have at least one published menu.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Select the check-box. Click '''Unpublish'''.

Highlight the error.

||Select the check-box to the left of '''Nutrient Articles submenu.'''

Click on the '''Unpublish''' button on the top toolbar.

The system shows an error '''Can't unpublish default home.'''

|-
||

||This means that the menu associated with the homepage cannot be unpublished.

|-
||Select the check-box.

||However, we can unpublish the parent menu.

Click on the check-box to the left of '''Multiple Categories'''

|-
||Click '''Unpublish.'''

||Click on '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar.

|-
||Highlight the '''Unpublish'''

||Unpublishing a menu also un-publishes all its submenus.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage

||Let's go to the '''Digital India''' webpage and check what we have done.

|-
||Press '''F5'''

||Refresh the '''homepage'''.

|-
||Highlight the error.
|| Notice that the homepage now shows an error '''The requested page cannot be found.'''

This is because the default home menu '''Nutrient Articles''' also got unpublished.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager'''

||Let's go back to the '''Menu Manager'''.

|-
||Click on the status icon.

||Publish the '''Multiple Categories''' by clicking on the '''Status''' icon.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage - Press '''F5.'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India webpage''' and refresh it.

|-
||

||Note that the error on the '''homepage''' has now gone.

|-
||
||We can see the '''Nutrient Articles''' being displayed.

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 7:

Summary: Same as narration
||In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Menus''' and their importance in '''Joomla'''.
*'''Menu Manager'''
*And how to create '''menu items'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 8:

Same as narration
||We also learnt how to:
*Create '''sub-menus'''
*Change the default homepage and
*Unpublish '''menu items'''.

|-
||Slide 9 & 10:

Assignment 1:
||Here are 2 assignments for you:

*Create a new '''menu item Category Blogs and Lists''' under the '''Main Menu'''.
*Create 2 '''submenus''' under this '''menu item.'''
Hint: Use the guidelines given in the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Click on the newly created menu items and understand the difference between the 2 menu types.

|-
||Assignment 2:

||
*Delete the menu item '''Nutrient Articles'''
*See if you can restore it back.
Hint: Use the Search Tools filter.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Formatting-article-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-08T10:36:24Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
Formatting Articles in Joomla.
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Basic Formatting of Articles in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Article''' editor in '''Joomla.'''
*Basic formatting for an '''article'''
*And styling an '''article''' text

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Insert '''lists'''
*Insert a '''page break''' and
*Insert '''Read More''' link in articles.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*You should know how to create '''articles''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, check the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6'''
Prior Knowledge

|| Earlier, we learnt to create, edit, delete and copy an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''.
Now, let’s learn how to format '''articles.'''

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''
|| Click on '''Article Manager. '''
Here are the articles we created earlier:
*'''“Benefits of Sodium”''' and
*'''“Vitamin A”'''

|-
||

|| Let us view them on the '''Digital India''' webpage.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top right of the page.

|-
||

|| We can see both our '''articles''' here.

|-
|| Click on “Benefits of Sodium”
|| Click on '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| We can see the '''article''' is not formatted.

|-
|| Click on the '''admin panel''' webpage in the browser.

Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

|| Let’s go back to the '''Article Manager.'''

Click on the article title '''“Benefits of Sodium”.'''

|-
|| Point to the editor

|| The editor in which we type the text of the '''article''', is called a '''WYSIWYG editor.'''

|-
|| While editing, this text can appear on the screen:
'''WYSIWYG : 'What You See Is What You Get'.'''

|| '''WYSIWYG''' is the abbreviation of ''''What You See Is What You Get'.'''

|-
||

|| It means the '''article''' looks the same in the web page as seen in the editing window.

|-
|| Point to the menu bar in the editor

|| Look at the menu bar of the editor now.

|-
|| Point to some options in the first row.

Now click on any 2 for demo

|| The first row has drop-down menus, which have various formatting options.

You can see the sub-options when you click on them.

|-
|| Point to some options in the 2nd row.

|| The second row has sets of formatting options.

|-
|| Point to each icon in the first set

|| So here, we see a set of text enhancement options like

'''Bold, Italics, Underline''' and '''Strikethrough. '''

|-
|| Point to each icon in the second set

|| Next, we see the options to align the text to the '''left, centre, right''' and '''justify'''.

|-
||

|| These work as in any other text editor.

|-
|| Point to '''Paragraph''' button

|| After the alignment options, we can see a button named '''Paragraph.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Paragraph'''

|| When we click on it, we can see various options like '''Heading 1, Heading 2''', etc.

These are pre-set options provided by '''Joomla''' for formatting purposes.

|-
||'''Show Slide 7''': Headings in Joomla

|| '''Headings''' are very useful in making text easier to read on the screen.

'''Headings''' also define the hierarchy of importance.

|-
|| Highlight '''Heading 1'''
Highlight '''Heading 6'''

|| '''Heading 1''' defines the most important heading and '''Heading 6''' is the least important.

|-
|| Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage.

Highlight '''Home.'''

|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage.

Here, the text '''Home''' is in '''Heading 1.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Benefits of Sodium'''

|| The title of an '''article''' in '''Joomla''' is in '''Heading 2.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu, Login Form'''

|| Other headings, like '''Main Menu''' and '''Login Form''' are in '''Heading 3'''.

|-
||

|| Notice that the font size keeps decreasing with levels of '''headings.'''

|-
|| Switch back to '''Edit Article''' webpage

|| Switch to the '''Edit Article webpage.'''

|-
||

|| Let us add one section on food sources of '''Sodium.'''

|-
|| Point the cursor to the end of the '''article'''>> Press '''Enter'''.

|| At the end of the '''article''' text, click '''Enter''' to begin a new paragraph.

|-
|| Type: '''Food Sources''':
Salt
Processed Food
Canned Food

|| Type '''Food Sources:''' as the heading.

We will type 3 sources here –
'''Salt, Processed Food''' and '''Canned Food'''.

|-
|| Select '''Food Sources''' >> Click on '''Paragraph''' button>> Select '''Heading 4'''

|| Select the text '''Food Sources:''' and in the Paragraph drop-down, select '''Heading 4'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Save'''

|| Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Switch to the webpage and press '''F5'''

|| Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh the page.

|-
||Highlight '''Food Sources'''

|| Notice that the text '''Food Sources''' appears in bold.

|-
|| Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage

||Go back to '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
|| Type: '''Let’s look at some sources of sodium'''

||Next to the heading '''Food Sources''', add the text -
'''Let’s look at some food sources of sodium.'''

|-
|| Point to the added text

||Here, we have added the text in the same paragraph.

The newly added text becomes part of the heading and is formatted as '''Heading 4.'''

|-
||

||Please note that the:

Header formatting applies to the entire paragraph and not to particular words.

|-
|| Press '''Enter'''.

||To separate this line from the heading, press '''Enter''' before the newly added text.

|-
||Select the text >> Click on '''Paragraph''' button→ '''Paragraph'''

||Then select the text and from the '''Paragraph''' drop-down select the option '''Paragraph'''.

The text is no longer in '''Heading 4''' format.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Place the cursor at the top of the page >>
Type '''Chemical Symbol of Sodium is Na'''

||Let me add a text line at the top of the page:
'''“Chemical Symbol of Sodium is Na.”'''

|-
||Select the new text line. Click on '''Paragraph → Pre'''.

||Select the text line and then from the '''Paragraph''' drop-down button select '''Pre'''.

|-
||Highlight the text line

||The '''Pre''' option is for preformatted text.

Preformatted text is displayed in fixed wide font, and preserves both spaces and line breaks.

|-
||Click on '''Save'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and press '''F5'''

||Go to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

Notice that the newly added text appears in a grey box.

It also appears in a different font and style.

|-
||Highlight the new text line

||'''Pre''' style is usually used for text that needs to stand out in an '''article'''.

This could be poetic stanza, computer code, quotes etc.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article'''.

||Switch to the '''Edit Article''' webpage again.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Point to the list options.

||Next, we have the '''bulleted list''' and '''numbered list''' options.

Let us see how to use them.

|-
||Select the last 3 lines

||Select the last 3 line items in the '''article''' text.

|-
||Click on bulleted list >> click on '''Save''' button

||Now click on '''bullet list''' icon and then click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Refresh the '''Homepage'''

||Refresh the '''Website''' to see the bulleted list in the '''article Benefits of Sodium'''.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Click on '''Edit Article''' webpage.

||Come back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Point the 3rd row icons one by one.

||The third row has some advanced formatting options like:

*Decrease and increase '''indent'''
*'''Un-do''' and '''Redo'''
*'''Insert links, images, tables''', etc.
*'''Superscript, subscript and special characters'''

You can try these on your own and see how they work.

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

|-
||

||Let’s look at our '''article''' again.

|-
||Point to the article sections '''health benefits of sodium''' and '''sources of sodium'''

||Here we have 2 sections:
*Text about introduction of sodium and its benefits and
*'''Food Sources.'''

Let’s separate these two sections using a horizontal line.

|-
||Point the cursor before '''Sources of Sodium''' text.

Click on '''Horizontal Line''' icon.

||Keep the cursor before the text '''Food Sources'''.

Now click on the '''Horizontal Line''' icon in the formatting menu bar.

This will insert a horizontal line.

|-
||Click on Save button >> Switch to the webpage and press F5

||'''Save''' and refresh the page.

We can see the changes in the '''article “Benefits of Sodium”'''.

|-
||

||Instead of inserting a horizontal line, why not put these 2 sections in 2 different pages?

Let’s try doing that.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage.

||Go back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Click on the horizontal line >> Press '''Backspace''' key.

||First we will remove the horizontal line.

So click on it and then press the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.

|-
||Place the cursor at the point

||Now place the cursor at the point where we want to insert the '''Page Break'''.

|-
||Scroll down >> Locate '''Page Break''' button >> Click on it

||Scroll down and locate the '''Page Break''' button at the bottom of the editor window.

Click on it.

|-
||

||It will open an '''Insert Pagebreak''' dialog box.

|-
||'''Page Title: Sources'''

'''Table of Contents: Sources of Sodium'''

||Enter '''Sources''' as '''Page Title''' and '''Food Sources of Sodium''' as '''Table of Contents Alias'''.

|-
||Click on '''Insert Page Break''' button >> Point to the zig-zag line between the two sections.

||Click on '''Insert Page Break''' button.

You will see a zig-zag line between the two sections.

|-
||Click on '''Save''' button >> Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and press '''F5'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Page 1 of 2.'''

||This page says '''Page 1 of 2'''.
|-
||Highlight '''Prev''' and '''Next.'''

||There are '''Prev''' and '''Next''' buttons below the '''article''' text.

|-
||Highlight block on the right.

||A new block has appeared on the right.

It helps us navigate to the various pages of the particular '''article'''.

|-
||Point to the Title in the block on the right

||The title of the 2nd page is the '''Table of Contents Alias''' we typed earlier…..

i.e. '''Food Sources of Sodium'''

|-
||Click on '''Next''' button.

||Click on '''Next''' button.

|-
||Highlight '''Page 2 of 2'''.

||Now, the page says '''Page 2 of 2'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Sources''' in '''Benefits of sodium - Sources'''

||Notice the '''Page Title''' that we typed in the '''Insert Pagebreak''' field.

|-
||Continue the highlight and point to the Title

||It has been appended to the title of the '''article'''.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, let’s click on the '''Digital India''' link to go back to our website’s '''Homepage'''.

|-
||Scroll down to show the '''article Benefits of Sodium.'''

||Scroll down to see the '''article Benefits of Sodium'''.

Notice here that the full '''article''' text is displayed on the '''Homepage'''.

|-
||

||Let us explore how to add a '''Read More''' option here.

This option will show only a part of the '''article''' on the '''Homepage'''.

|-
||On the '''Homepage''', point to the text:
'''Daily consumption of…….. '''

||For this '''article''', I’ll insert a '''Read More''' link before the text:
Daily consumption of sodium, however, depends on a number of factors.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Place the cursor before '''Daily consumption of …..'''

||Place the cursor at the point where you want to insert the '''Read More''' link.

|-
||Click on '''Read More''' button.

||Now, at the bottom, click on the '''Read More''' button next to the '''Page Break''' button.

|-
||Click on '''Save''' button.

||Scroll up and click on the '''Save''' button.

Switch to the webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Read More: Benefits of sodium'''

||We can see the '''Read More''' link below the '''article''' text here.

|-
||Click on '''Read More: Benefits of sodium'''

||When we click on it, the '''article Benefits of Sodium''' opens.

And it will display the full '''article''' in 2 pages, just as we had set it earlier.

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarise.

|-
||Switch to Slide 8:

'''Summary: Same as narration'''

||In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Article''' editor in '''Joomla'''.
*Basic formatting of an '''article'''
*Styling an '''article''' text

|-
||Switch to Slide 9:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:

*Insert '''Lists'''
*Insert '''Page Break''' and
*Insert '''Read More''' in '''articles'''.

|-
||Slide 10 & 11:

Assignment

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Modify the 4 health benefits of '''sodium''' as a numbered list.
*Center align the heading '''Food Sources'''.
*Remove the '''Read More''' link and put it just before '''Food Sources'''
*Add the text '''Melting Point 97.72 °C''' as pre-formatted text along with the current pre-formatted text.
Hint: Use special characters to get the text '''°C''' in the '''article'''.
*Save the '''article.'''
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Categories-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-08T10:21:18Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Categories in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Categories in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla.'''
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category.'''
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| This tutorial is recorded using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

||
*Learner of this tutorial should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, pls refer to the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
||
Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''

|| Click on '''Article Manager''' in the left menu.

|-
||
|| We currently have 2 articles - '''Vitamin A''' and '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| In order to understand categories in '''Joomla''', let’s create a few more articles.

|-
|| Show Slide 6:
Assignment1

Create Articles:

'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''

'''*Fish'''

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|| Pause this tutorial and do this assignment.

*Open the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial.
*Follow the instructions to create 4 new articles:
'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
|| Scroll down to highlight all the articles.

|| We now have 6 '''articles''' in '''Article Manager:'''
'''*Vitamin A'''

'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Sodium'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients '''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
||
|| The 2 articles on '''Vitamins''' are similar in content.

So, we should group them together.

|-
||

|| '''Categories''' in '''Joomla''' helps to organize the articles in a logical order.

|-
|| Click on '''Categories'''

Click on '''Content''' → Hover over '''Category Manager'''

|| Click on '''Categories''' in the left menu.

Alternately, click on '''Content Menu''' at the top and then on '''Category Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Search''' and '''Search Tools'''

|| Notice that the '''Category Manager''' has a similar layout as that of the '''Article Manager.'''

It has a '''Search''' box and '''Search Tools''' button to filter the '''Categories.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Uncategorized.'''

|| By default, we have one '''category''' called '''Uncategorized.'''

Recollect that all our '''articles''' appeared as '''Uncategorized.'''

|-
|| Click on '''New'''

|| To create a new '''category''', click on the '''New''' button on the top left.

|-
||

|| The only mandatory field to create a '''category''' is the '''Category Title.'''

|-
|| Write '''Vitamin''' in the title textbox

|| I will write '''Vitamin''' as the title in the title textbox.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Highlight the new category

|| You can see that the new '''category''' has now been created.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin'''

|| To edit or rename a '''category''', click on the title of the '''category.'''

|-
|| Edit '''Vitamin''' to '''Vitamins'''

|| I will rename the title to '''Vitamins.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save and New'''

|| This time let’s click on '''Save and New''' button.

|-
|| Type '''Minerals''' in the title textbox.
Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Parent''' drop-down

|| We are prompted to add a new '''category.'''

Let’s type '''Minerals''' as the title.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

|| Now, '''Minerals''' and '''Vitamins''' are nutrients that our bodies need.

Let us put them in a broader '''category Nutrients.'''

|-
|| Click on New.
Write '''Nutrients''' in the title textbox.

|| Click on New and type '''Nutrients''' as the title.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
||

|| Let us put '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' under the category '''Nutrients'''.

A '''category''' under another category is called '''subcategory.'''

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals'''

|| Select the two '''categories''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
||

|| We can batch process these 2 categories.

Batch processing means working on things in groups.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

|| Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

|| A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Categories''' opens.

It has many options.

|-
|| Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

|| For now, we are only going to change the '''parent category''' of these '''categories'''.

So, select '''Nutrients''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
|| Highlight '''Copy''' and '''Move'''.

|| There are 2 '''radio buttons''' below the drop-down, namely:
1. '''Copy'''
2. '''Move'''

'''Copy''' will make a copy of the selected '''categories''' in the selected '''category'''.

'''Move''' will move the '''category''' from their previous '''category''' to the selected '''category'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

|| Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process.'''

|-
||Highlight the -

||Notice a hyphen in front of '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' categories. This indicates that they are subcategories of the main category '''Nutrients.'''

|-
||Show Slide 7.

'''Assignment 2.'''

|| Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Create a new '''Category Carbohydrates'''.
*Click on '''Parent''' drop-down on the right and select '''Nutrients'''.
*Click on '''Save and Close'''.
Notice that this is another way to assign '''categories''' and '''subcategories''' to a '''parent category.'''

|-
|| Highlight the category tree.

||Now, we have a '''Category tree.'''

There are 2 main '''categories''':

*'''Uncategorized'''
*and '''Nutrients'''.

Under '''Nutrients'''. we have 3 '''sub-categories''':
*'''Vitamins,'''
*'''Minerals''' and
*'''Carbohydrates'''

|-
||
||Now, let us learn how to organize various articles under different categories.

|-
|| Click on '''Articles'''

||From '''Category Manager''', click on '''Articles''' in the left menu.

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B'''.

||Select the two '''vitamin articles''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

||Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar on top.

|-
||

||A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Articles''' opens.

|-
||Select '''Vitamins''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

||Select '''Vitamins''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
||Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

||Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process''' button.

|-
||Highlight the category

||Notice that the '''category''' for our '''articles Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B''' has changed

|-
||

||Let us change the category of '''Benefits of Sodium''' to '''Minerals'''.

|-
||Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

||Click on the title '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||Select '''Minerals''' in category drop-down.

Click on '''Save and Close'''

||In the '''Category''' drop-down on the right, select '''Minerals''', then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Highlight the '''category'''

||Note that the '''category''' of '''Benefits of Sodium''' has been changed to '''Minerals.'''

|-
||Show Slide 8:

'''Assignment 3.'''

||Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Click on '''Benefits of Nutrients''' article.
*Change the category to '''Nutrients.'''
*Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

||Now it’s time to check all these changes on the '''Digital India''' webpage.
Before that, ensure that '''Show Category''' is set to '''Show''' for the '''articles.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options'''

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar at the top right corner.

|-
||Select '''Show''' in '''Show Category.'''

Select '''Yes''' in '''Link Category.'''

||Set '''Show Category''' to '''Show''' and '''Link Category''' to '''Yes.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, click on the '''Digital India''' link at the top right.

|-
||Highlight the '''Category''' in the articles.

||Notice that the '''articles''' have different '''Category''' names in their '''header.'''

|-
||Click on '''Nutrients'''

||Click on the '''Category Nutrients''' in the '''article''' header of '''Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||Scroll down to highlight the article and subcategories.

||Observe that it lists one '''article''' and 2 '''subcategories''' –
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals.'''

This is how we had organized the '''categories.'''

|-
||Highlight '''Subcategories'''

||Note that the category '''Carbohydrates''' is not visible here.

A '''category''' having neither '''articles''' nor '''subcategories''' is an empty '''Category.'''

And hence it is not visible on the webpage.

|-
||

||Can we relax this restriction?

Let us see how to change the settings to get the empty '''categories''' displayed.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager''' webpage

||Switch to the '''Article Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Categories.'''

||Click on the '''Categories''' in the left menu to go to the '''Category Manager.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options''' button.

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar on right.

|-
||Highlight the title.

||Note that the '''Category Manager Options''' page is the same as '''Article Manager Options.'''

Even the title says '''Article Manager Options.'''

|-
||

||There are tabs in this page to control the settings of '''articles, categories, menus''' etc.

|-
||Click on '''Category''' tab.

||Click on the tab '''Category.'''

|-
||

||The tab will show the settings of the page which shows all '''articles''' under a particular '''category.'''

|-
||Scroll down. Highlight '''Empty Category'''

Select '''Show'''.

||Scroll down to see the option '''Empty Category'''.

Set this as '''Show.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|-
||Switch to '''‘Digital India’''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''‘Digital India’''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Carbohydrates'''

||Look, the '''Carbohydrates''' subcategory is now visible.
|-
||Switch to '''Category Manager''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Category Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Point to '''Carbohydrates'''

||The '''subcategory Carbohydrates''' does not have any '''articles''' under it.

|-
||Point to '''Unpublish''' and then to '''Delete'''.

||We can either:
*Unpublish it or
*Delete it.

Let’s understand the difference between the two options.

|-
||Show Slide 9:

Unpublishing a Category

||When we unpublish a '''category''':
*No new '''article''' can be assigned to that '''category'''.
*All its '''subcategories''' are automatically unpublished and
*Articles under the '''category''' are no longer visible on the website, even if they are published.

|-
||Show Slide 10:

'''Deleting a Category'''

||When we delete a '''category''':
*It is moved to '''Trash''', along with all the '''articles''' under it.
*A deleted '''category''' can be restored again or the same could be trashed permanently.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager'''

||Come back to the '''Category Manager.''' webpage

Since we are not using the '''category Carbohydrates''', let's unpublish it for now.

|-
||Select '''Carbohydrates'''

||Locate the '''category Carbohydrates''' from the ‘Categories’ Manager page.

Now select it by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''Status''' column.

|-
||Click on '''Unpublish'''

||Click on the '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar on top.

|-
||Highlight the message

||Immediately, a success message appears.

|-
||Highlight the status

||Observe that the status of the '''category Carbohydrates''' has changed to '''Unpublished'''.

|-
||

||Let us go back to the '''Digital India''' webpage and verify this.

|-
||Switch to the Digital India webpage. Click '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the category '''Carbohydrates''' is no longer visible.

This is because it has been '''unpublished.'''

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 11:

Summary: Same as narration

||In this tutorial, we learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla'''.
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 12:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:
*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category'''.
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
||Slide 13, 14, 15 & 16:

'''Assignment 4:'''

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Create a new '''category Food Sources'''.
*Create 2 subcategories '''Veg Sources and Non-veg Sources''' under the category '''Food Sources.'''
*Assign the article '''Fish''' to '''Non-Veg''' sources.
*Assign the article '''Green Vegetables''' to '''Veg Sources'''.
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||Assignment 5:

||
*Delete the '''category Veg Sources'''.

*Try to restore it back.

Hint: Use the filter to see '''Trashed categories'''.

|-
||Assignment 6:

||
*Edit the category '''Vitamins''' to add a description.
*Change the settings to show the description and number of articles in a category.
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Formatting-article-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-08T07:48:34Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
Formatting Articles in Joomla.
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Basic Formatting of Articles in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Article''' editor in '''Joomla.'''
*Basic formatting for an '''article'''
*And styling an '''article''' text

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Insert '''lists'''
*Insert a '''page break''' and
*Insert '''Read More''' link in articles.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*You should know how to create '''articles''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, check the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6'''
Prior Knowledge

|| Earlier, we learnt to create, edit, copy and delete an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''.
Now, let’s learn how to format '''articles.'''

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''
|| Click on '''Article Manager. '''
Here are the articles we created earlier:
*'''“Benefits of Sodium”''' and
*'''“Vitamin A”'''

|-
||

|| Let us view them on the '''Digital India''' webpage.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top right of the page.

|-
||

|| We can see both our '''articles''' here.

|-
|| Click on “Benefits of Sodium”
|| Click on '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| We can see the '''article''' is not formatted.

|-
|| Click on the '''admin panel''' webpage in the browser.

Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

|| Let’s go back to the '''Article Manager.'''

Click on the article title '''“Benefits of Sodium”.'''

|-
|| Point to the editor

|| The editor in which we type the text of the '''article''', is called a '''WYSIWYG editor.'''

|-
|| While editing, this text can appear on the screen:
'''WYSIWYG : 'What You See Is What You Get'.'''

|| '''WYSIWYG''' is the abbreviation of ''''What You See Is What You Get'.'''

|-
||

|| It means the '''article''' looks the same in the web page as seen in the editing window.

|-
|| Point to the menu bar in the editor

|| Look at the menu bar of the editor now.

|-
|| Point to some options in the first row.

Now click on any 2 for demo

|| The first row has drop-down menus, which have various formatting options.

You can see the sub-options when you click on them.

|-
|| Point to some options in the 2nd row.

|| The second row has sets of formatting options.

|-
|| Point to each icon in the first set

|| So here, we see a set of text enhancement options like

'''Bold, Italics, Underline''' and '''Strikethrough. '''

|-
|| Point to each icon in the second set

|| Next, we see the options to align the text to the '''left, centre, right''' and '''justify'''.

|-
||

|| These work as in any other text editor.

|-
|| Point to '''Paragraph''' button

|| After the alignment options, we can see a button named '''Paragraph.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Paragraph'''

|| When we click on it, we can see various options like '''Heading 1, Heading 2''', etc.

These are pre-set options provided by '''Joomla''' for formatting purposes.

|-
||'''Show Slide 7''': Headings in Joomla

|| '''Headings''' are very useful in making text easier to read on the screen.

'''Headings''' also define the hierarchy of importance.

|-
|| Highlight '''Heading 1'''
Highlight '''Heading 6'''

|| '''Heading 1''' defines the most important heading and '''Heading 6''' is the least important.

|-
|| Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage.

Highlight '''Home.'''

|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage.

Here, the text '''Home''' is in '''Heading 1.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Benefits of Sodium'''

|| The title of an '''article''' in '''Joomla''' is in '''Heading 2.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu, Login Form'''

|| Other headings, like '''Main Menu''' and '''Login Form''' are in '''Heading 3'''.

|-
||

|| Notice that the font size keeps decreasing with levels of '''headings.'''

|-
|| Switch back to '''Edit Article''' webpage

|| Switch to the '''Edit Article webpage.'''

|-
||

|| Let us add one section on food sources of '''Sodium.'''

|-
|| Point the cursor to the end of the '''article'''>> Press '''Enter'''.

|| At the end of the '''article''' text, click '''Enter''' to begin a new paragraph.

|-
|| Type: '''Food Sources''':
Salt
Processed Food
Canned Food

|| Type '''Food Sources:''' as the heading.

We will type 3 sources here –
'''Salt, Processed Food''' and '''Canned Food'''.

|-
|| Select '''Food Sources''' >> Click on '''Paragraph''' button>> Select '''Heading 4'''

|| Select the text '''Food Sources:''' and in the Paragraph drop-down, select '''Heading 4'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Save'''

|| Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Switch to the webpage and press '''F5'''

|| Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh the page.

|-
||Highlight '''Food Sources'''

|| Notice that the text '''Food Sources''' appears in bold.

|-
|| Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage

||Go back to '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
|| Type: '''Let’s look at some sources of sodium'''

||Next to the heading '''Food Sources''', add the text -
'''Let’s look at some food sources of sodium.'''

|-
|| Point to the added text

||Here, we have added the text in the same paragraph.

The newly added text becomes part of the heading and is formatted as '''Heading 4.'''

|-
||

||Please note that the:

Header formatting applies to the entire paragraph and not to particular words.

|-
|| Press '''Enter'''.

||To separate this line from the heading, press '''Enter''' before the newly added text.

|-
||Select the text >> Click on '''Paragraph''' button→ '''Paragraph'''

||Then select the text and from the '''Paragraph''' drop-down select the option '''Paragraph'''.

The text is no longer in '''Heading 4''' format.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Place the cursor at the top of the page >>
Type '''Chemical Symbol of Sodium is Na'''

||Let me add a text line at the top of the page:
'''“Chemical Symbol of Sodium is Na.”'''

|-
||Select the new text line. Click on '''Paragraph → Pre'''.

||Select the text line and then from the '''Paragraph''' drop-down button select '''Pre'''.

|-
||Highlight the text line

||The '''Pre''' option is for preformatted text.

Preformatted text is displayed in fixed wide font, and preserves both spaces and line breaks.

|-
||Click on '''Save'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and press '''F5'''

||Go to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

Notice that the newly added text appears in a grey box.

It also appears in a different font and style.

|-
||Highlight the new text line

||'''Pre''' style is usually used for text that needs to stand out in an '''article'''.

This could be poetic stanza, computer code, quotes etc.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article'''.

||Switch to the '''Edit Article''' webpage again.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Point to the list options.

||Next, we have the '''bulleted list''' and '''numbered list''' options.

Let us see how to use them.

|-
||Select the last 3 lines

||Select the last 3 line items in the '''article''' text.

|-
||Click on bulleted list >> click on '''Save''' button

||Now click on '''bullet list''' icon and then click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Refresh the '''Homepage'''

||Refresh the '''Website''' to see the bulleted list in the '''article Benefits of Sodium'''.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Click on '''Edit Article''' webpage.

||Come back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Point the 3rd row icons one by one.

||The third row has some advanced formatting options like:

*Decrease and increase '''indent'''
*'''Un-do''' and '''Redo'''
*'''Insert links, images, tables''', etc.
*'''Superscript, subscript and special characters'''

You can try these on your own and see how they work.

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

|-
||

||Let’s look at our '''article''' again.

|-
||Point to the article sections '''health benefits of sodium''' and '''sources of sodium'''

||Here we have 2 sections:
*Text about introduction of sodium and its benefits and
*'''Food Sources.'''

Let’s separate these two sections using a horizontal line.

|-
||Point the cursor before '''Sources of Sodium''' text.

Click on '''Horizontal Line''' icon.

||Keep the cursor before the text '''Food Sources'''.

Now click on the '''Horizontal Line''' icon in the formatting menu bar.

This will insert a horizontal line.

|-
||Click on Save button >> Switch to the webpage and press F5

||'''Save''' and refresh the page.

We can see the changes in the '''article “Benefits of Sodium”'''.

|-
||

||Instead of inserting a horizontal line, why not put these 2 sections in 2 different pages?

Let’s try doing that.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage.

||Go back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Click on the horizontal line >> Press '''Backspace''' key.

||First we will remove the horizontal line.

So click on it and then press the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.

|-
||Place the cursor at the point

||Now place the cursor at the point where we want to insert the '''Page Break'''.

|-
||Scroll down >> Locate '''Page Break''' button >> Click on it

||Scroll down and locate the '''Page Break''' button at the bottom of the editor window.

Click on it.

|-
||

||It will open an '''Insert Pagebreak''' dialog box.

|-
||'''Page Title: Sources'''

'''Table of Contents: Sources of Sodium'''

||Enter '''Sources''' as '''Page Title''' and '''Food Sources of Sodium''' as '''Table of Contents Alias'''.

|-
||Click on '''Insert Page Break''' button >> Point to the zig-zag line between the two sections.

||Click on '''Insert Page Break''' button.

You will see a zig-zag line between the two sections.

|-
||Click on '''Save''' button >> Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and press '''F5'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Page 1 of 2.'''

||This page says '''Page 1 of 2'''.
|-
||Highlight '''Prev''' and '''Next.'''

||There are '''Prev''' and '''Next''' buttons below the '''article''' text.

|-
||Highlight block on the right.

||A new block has appeared on the right.

It helps us navigate to the various pages of the particular '''article'''.

|-
||Point to the Title in the block on the right

||The title of the 2nd page is the '''Table of Contents Alias''' we typed earlier…..

i.e. '''Food Sources of Sodium'''

|-
||Click on '''Next''' button.

||Click on '''Next''' button.

|-
||Highlight '''Page 2 of 2'''.

||Now, the page says '''Page 2 of 2'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Sources''' in '''Benefits of sodium - Sources'''

||Notice the '''Page Title''' that we typed in the '''Insert Pagebreak''' field.

|-
||Continue the highlight and point to the Title

||It has been appended to the title of the '''article'''.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, let’s click on the '''Digital India''' link to go back to our website’s '''Homepage'''.

|-
||Scroll down to show the '''article Benefits of Sodium.'''

||Scroll down to see the '''article Benefits of Sodium'''.

Notice here that the full '''article''' text is displayed on the '''Homepage'''.

|-
||

||Let us explore how to add a '''Read More''' option here.

This option will show only a part of the '''article''' on the '''Homepage'''.

|-
||On the '''Homepage''', point to the text:
'''Daily consumption of…….. '''

||For this '''article''', I’ll insert a '''Read More''' link before the text:
Daily consumption of sodium, however, depends on a number of factors.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Place the cursor before '''Daily consumption of …..'''

||Place the cursor at the point where you want to insert the '''Read More''' link.

|-
||Click on '''Read More''' button.

||Now, at the bottom, click on the '''Read More''' button next to the '''Page Break''' button.

|-
||Click on '''Save''' button.

||Scroll up and click on the '''Save''' button.

Switch to the webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Read More: Benefits of sodium'''

||We can see the '''Read More''' link below the '''article''' text here.

|-
||Click on '''Read More: Benefits of sodium'''

||When we click on it, the '''article Benefits of Sodium''' opens.

And it will display the full '''article''' in 2 pages, just as we had set it earlier.

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarise.

|-
||Switch to Slide 8:

'''Summary: Same as narration'''

||In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Article''' editor in '''Joomla'''.
*Basic formatting of an '''article'''
*Styling an '''article''' text

|-
||Switch to Slide 9:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:

*Insert '''Lists'''
*Insert '''Page Break''' and
*Insert '''Read More''' in '''articles'''.

|-
||Slide 10 & 11:

Assignment

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Modify the 4 health benefits of '''sodium''' as a numbered list.
*Center align the heading '''Food Sources'''.
*Remove the '''Read More''' link and put it just before '''Food Sources'''
*Add the text '''Melting Point 97.72 °C''' as pre-formatted text along with the current pre-formatted text.
Hint: Use special characters to get the text '''°C''' in the '''article'''.
*Save the '''article.'''
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at the following link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''. More information on this mission is available at the link shown.

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Menus-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-05T07:57:12Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with "{| border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Show Slide 1:''' '''Understanding Menus in Joomla.''' || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Understanding menus..."

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Understanding Menus in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Understanding menus in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Menus''' and their importance in '''Joomla'''.
*'''Menu Manager'''
*And how to create '''menu items'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Create '''sub-menus'''
*Change the default homepage and
*Unpublish '''menu items'''.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*Learner of this tutorial should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, pls refer to the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
|| Open the browser with '''Digital India''' homepage. '''http://localhost/joomla'''

|| Let’s go to our '''Digital India''' webpage to understand more about '''menus.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu'''

|| On the right of the homepage, there is a box which says '''"Main Menu"'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Home'''
|| It currently has only one '''menu, "Home"'''.
By default, this is the only '''menu''' available in '''Joomla'''.

|-
||

|| '''Menus''' are a way to help us navigate the website. Every '''menu''' has a set of '''menu items'''.
Here '''"Home"''' is a '''menu item''', which points to all '''Featured articles.'''
This is the reason why any '''article''' that is marked as '''"featured"''' appears on our homepage.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin A.'''

Click on category link '''Vitamins'''
|| Every '''menu item''' defines a '''URL''' to a '''webpage'''.
A menu item can be set to point to an '''article''', like '''Vitamin A''' here.
Or it can be set to list all '''articles''' under a category, like '''Vitamins'''.

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Menu Manager'''.

Click on '''Menus''' → Hover over '''Menu Manager'''
|| Click on '''Menu Manager''' in the left menu.

Alternately, you may click on '''Menus''' in the menu-bar at the top of the webpage and then on '''Menu Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu'''

|| By default, we have one menu called '''Main Menu'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Main Menu'''.

|| Click on the title '''Main Menu'''. We can see the menu items associated with this menu.

Notice that '''Menu Manager: Menu Items''' has a similar layout as '''Article Manager'''.

|-
||

|| Let’s create a '''menu item''' which will point to our '''article "Nutrients"'''.

|-
|| Click on '''New'''.

|| Click on '''New''' button in the toolbar.

|-
|| Highlight '''Menu Item Type'''.

Point to various options.
|| '''Menu Item Type''' field decides the type of page to be shown when we click on that '''menu item'''.

There are various options like '''Single Article, List of articles in a category''' etc.

|-
|| Click on '''Select.'''

|| Click on the '''Select''' button next to the '''Menu Item Type'''.

A new window opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Articles → Single Article'''

|| Click on '''Articles''' in the new window.

We can see a list of options under Articles.

Click on '''Single Article'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Select Article'''.

|| Depending on '''Menu Item Type''', some new parameters may be required.

Since we have selected '''Single Article''', a new field '''Select Article''' has appeared.

|-
|| Click on '''Select.'''

|| This is a mandatory field. Click on '''Select''' button next to this field.

|-
|| Highlight '''Search text box.'''

|| A new window opens with a complete list of '''articles'''.

This window has a search text box which works on the title of the '''article'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''filters.'''

|| It also has filters to narrow down the list of '''articles''' visible in the window.

|-
|| Click on '''Nutrients.'''

|| Let’s select the '''article Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||

|| For now, we will keep the default settings in all the other fields in this window.

|-
||Write '''Single Article – Nutrients''' in the ‘Menu Title’ field

|| Right on the top, we have the '''Menu Title''' field.

This is a mandatory field.

Let us type '''Single Article - Nutrients''' as the '''title'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
|| Click on '''Single Article – Nutrients'''

|| Notice the new '''menu item''' link. Click on it.

|-
||

|| We can see the '''article Benefits of Nutrients''' is displayed here.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''.

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top left to go back to the homepage.

|-
|| Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|| Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
|| Click on '''Single Article – Nutrients'''

|| Let's change the '''Single Article-Nutrients menu item''' to '''List of categories'''.

So, click on the '''title Single Article-Nutrients'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Select'''.

Click on '''Articles -> List all Categories'''

|| Click on '''Select''' next to '''Menu Item Type.'''

In the new pop-up window, click on '''Articles''' and then on '''List All Categories'''.

|-
||

|| We are back to the '''menu manager''' window.

|-
|| Highlight '''Select a Top Level Category'''.

|| Notice now that a new field appears.

It requires us to select the '''Top Level Category'''.

This is the '''category''' whose '''subcategories''' will be listed under this '''menu item'''.

By default, it is '''Root.'''

|-
||

|| We will leave all the other fields as they are.

|-
||Select '''Single Article - Nutrients'''. Delete it.
Type '''Multiple Categories.'''

||But we will change the '''menu title''' to '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''.

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
|| Click on '''Multiple Categories'''.

||In the '''Main Menu''', click on '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
|| Highlight '''Nutrients''' and '''Food Sources.'''

Highlight the numbers.

||Notice that two of our categories '''Nutrients''' and '''Food Sources''' are shown on the top left of the webpage.

The numbers next to the category indicate the number of articles under that category.

Also, notice that the category '''Uncategorized''' is not shown here.

That is because it has neither any article nor any subcategory assigned to it.

|-
|| Click on '''Nutrients'''.

Scroll down to see the article and sub-categories.

||Click on '''Nutrients''' link.

The article '''Benefits of Nutrients''' and subcategories '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' are shown here.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India.'''

||Click on '''Digital India''' link at the top left to go back to the homepage

|-
||'''Slide''':

Menu Tree

||A '''menu item''' can have '''sub-menus''', similar to how a '''category''' can have '''sub-categories'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||

||Let's create a '''submenu''' under '''Multiple Categories'''.

|-
||Click on '''New'''.

||On the '''Menu Items''' page, click on '''New''' button.

|-
||Click on '''Select → Articles → Category List'''

||Click the '''Select''' button next to '''Menu Item Type''' and then on '''Articles'''.

Select '''Category List'''. This will display a list of '''articles''' in a '''category'''.

|-
||
||A new field '''Choose a Category''' appears.

|-
||Select '''Nutrients''' in the drop-down '''Choose a Category'''.

||By default, the selected category is '''Uncategorised'''.

Let's select '''Nutrients''' in the dropdown list.

|-
||Highlight drop-down '''Parent Item.'''

Select '''All Categories Menu'''.

||On the right, there is a field to select the '''parent item'''.
Click on it.

Then select the option '''Multiple Categories.'''

|-
||Type '''Nutrient Articles''' in Menu title text box.

||Lastly let's give this '''menu''' a '''title''' - we will call it '''Nutrient Articles'''.

|-
||Click on '''Save'''

||And click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||
||Let’s have a look at the all the changes on the '''Digital India webpage'''.

|-
||Refresh the '''Digital India webpage.'''

||Let’s refresh the '''webpage''' and click on '''Multiple categories menu item'''.

|-
||Point to '''sub-menu item Nutrient Articles'''

||Immediately, we see the '''sub-menu item Nutrient Articles''' displayed below it.

Click on it.

|-
||Point to both the table and then to the '''sub-categories'''

||This page lists all the '''articles''' under this '''category''' in a tabular format.

The '''sub-categories'''-
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' are listed separately.
<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Highlight the URL for this webpage

||Now, let’s have a look at the '''title''' that is displayed for this '''web-page'''.

It says '''Nutrient Articles''', as you can see here.

|-
||

||How can we change this '''title''' to a different one?

We can do this through the '''menu settings'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|| Switch to the '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Page Display.'''

||Let’s click on the '''tab Page Display'''.

|-
||

||Note that here all the page settings are optional.

|-
||

||In '''Browser Page Title''' field, type '''Nutrient Category'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Then click on '''Save and Close''' button.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''.

||Switch to the '''Digital India webpage''' and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice the browser '''title''' now.

It says '''Nutrient Category.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India.'''

||Click on the '''Digital India''' link to go back to the '''homepage'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Let us switch back to the '''Menu Manager'''.

|-
||Point to '''Home''' button.

||Notice the '''Home''' button in the top toolbar.

|-
||

||This makes the '''page''' associated with the selected '''menu''' as the website '''homepage'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Home''' menu.

||By default, the '''menu item Home''' is set as the default '''homepage'''.

|-
||Hover cursor over '''Home''' column button.

||We can verify this by hovering the cursor on the '''Home''' column button.

The tool tip says '''“Default”.'''

|-
||

||Let's make the '''Nutrient Articles submenu''' as our default '''homepage'''.

|-
||Select the check-box to the left of '''Nutrient Articles → Home.'''

||Click on the check-box to the left of the title and click on '''Home''' button in the toolbar.

|-
||Point to yellow star.

||Notice that the yellow star now appears next to this '''submenu'''.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the homepage has changed.

|-
||Show Slide 6:

Importance of Menus

||'''Menus''' are important in '''Joomla''' because
*Content can be displayed only via menus and
*Every website must have at least one published menu.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

||Switch to '''Menu Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Select the check-box. Click '''Unpublish'''.

Highlight the error.

||Select the check-box to the left of '''Nutrient Articles submenu.'''

Click on the '''Unpublish''' button on the top toolbar.

The system shows an error '''Can't unpublish default home.'''

|-
||

||This means that the menu associated with the homepage cannot be unpublished.

|-
||Select the check-box.

||However, we can unpublish the parent menu.

Click on the check-box to the left of '''Multiple Categories'''

|-
||Click '''Unpublish.'''

||Click on '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar.

|-
||Highlight the '''Unpublish'''

||Unpublishing a menu also un-publishes all its submenus.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage

||Let's go to the '''Digital India''' webpage and check what we have done.

|-
||Press '''F5'''

||Refresh the '''homepage'''.

|-
||Highlight the error.
|| Notice that the homepage now shows an error '''The requested page cannot be found.'''

This is because the default home menu '''Nutrient Articles''' also got unpublished.

|-
||Switch to '''Menu Manager'''

||Let's go back to the '''Menu Manager'''.

|-
||Click on the status icon.

||Publish the '''Multiple Categories''' by clicking on the '''Status''' icon.

|-
||Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage - Press '''F5.'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India webpage''' and refresh it.

|-
||

||Note that the error on the '''homepage''' has now gone.

|-
||
||We can see the '''Nutrient Articles''' being displayed.

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 7:

Summary: Same as narration
||In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Menus''' and their importance in '''Joomla'''.
*'''Menu Manager'''
*And how to create '''menu items'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 8:

Same as narration
||We also learnt how to:
*Create '''sub-menus'''
*Change the default homepage and
*Unpublish '''menu items'''.

|-
||Slide 9 & 10:

Assignment 1:
||Here are 2 assignments for you:

*Create a new '''menu item Category Blogs and Lists''' under the '''Main Menu'''.
*Create 2 '''submenus''' under this '''menu item.'''
Hint: Use the guidelines given in the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Click on the newly created menu items and understand the difference between the 2 menu types.

|-
||Assignment 2:

||
*Delete the menu item '''Nutrient Articles'''
*See if you can restore it back.
Hint: Use the Search Tools filter.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Categories-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-05T06:53:03Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Categories in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Categories in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla.'''
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category.'''
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*Learner of this tutorial should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, pls refer to the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
||
Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''

|| Click on '''Article Manager''' in the left menu.

|-
||
|| We currently have 2 articles - '''Vitamin A''' and '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| In order to understand categories in '''Joomla''', let’s create a few more articles.

|-
|| Show Slide 6:
Assignment1

Create Articles:

'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''

'''*Fish'''

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|| Pause this tutorial and do this assignment.

*Open the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial.
*Follow the instructions to create 4 new articles:
'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
|| Scroll down to highlight all the articles.

|| We now have 6 '''articles''' in '''Article Manager:'''
'''*Vitamin A'''

'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Sodium'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients '''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
||
|| The 2 articles on '''Vitamins''' are similar in content.

So, we should group them together.

|-
||

|| '''Categories''' in '''Joomla''' helps to organize the articles in a logical order.

|-
|| Click on '''Categories'''

Click on '''Content''' → Hover over '''Category Manager'''

|| Click on '''Categories''' in the left menu.

Alternately, click on '''Content Menu''' at the top and then on '''Category Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Search''' and '''Search Tools'''

|| Notice that the '''Category Manager''' has a similar layout as that of the '''Article Manager.'''

It has a '''Search''' box and '''Search Tools''' button to filter the '''Categories.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Uncategorized.'''

|| By default, we have one '''category''' called '''Uncategorized.'''

Recollect that all our '''articles''' appeared as '''Uncategorized.'''

|-
|| Click on '''New'''

|| To create a new '''category''', click on the '''New''' button on the top left.

|-
||

|| The only mandatory field to create a '''category''' is the '''Category Title.'''

|-
|| Write '''Vitamin''' in the title textbox

|| I will write '''Vitamin''' as the title in the title textbox.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Highlight the new category

|| You can see that the new '''category''' has been now created.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin'''

|| To edit or rename a '''category''', click on the title of the '''category.'''

|-
|| Edit '''Vitamin''' to '''Vitamins'''

|| I will rename the title to '''Vitamins.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save and New'''

|| This time let’s click on '''Save and New''' button.

|-
|| Type '''Minerals''' in the title textbox.
Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Parent''' drop-down

|| We are prompted to add a new '''category.'''

Let’s type '''Minerals''' as the title.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

|| Now, '''Minerals''' and '''Vitamins''' are nutrients that our bodies need.

Let us put them in a broader '''category Nutrients.'''

|-
|| Click on New.
Write '''Nutrients''' in the title textbox.

|| Click on New and type '''Nutrients''' as the title.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
||

|| Let us put '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' under the category '''Nutrients'''.

A '''category''' under another category is called '''subcategory.'''

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals'''

|| Select the two '''categories''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
||

|| We can batch process these 2 categories.

Batch processing means working on things in groups.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

|| Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

|| A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Categories''' opens.

It has many options.

|-
|| Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

|| For now, we are only going to change the '''parent category''' of these '''categories'''.

So, select '''Nutrients''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
|| Highlight '''Copy''' and '''Move'''.

|| There are 2 '''radio buttons''' below the drop-down, namely:
1. '''Copy'''
2. '''Move'''

'''Copy''' will make a copy of the selected '''categories''' in the selected '''category'''.

'''Move''' will move the '''category''' from their previous '''category''' to the selected '''category'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

|| Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process.'''

|-
||Highlight the -

||Notice a hyphen in front of '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' categories. This indicates that they are subcategories of the main category '''Nutrients.'''

|-
||Show Slide 7.

'''Assignment 2.'''

|| Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Create a new '''Category Carbohydrates'''.
*Click on '''Parent''' drop-down on the right and select '''Nutrients'''.
*Click on '''Save and Close'''.
Notice that this is another way to assign '''categories''' and '''subcategories''' to a '''parent category.'''

|-
|| Highlight the category tree.

||Now, we have a '''Category tree.'''

There are 2 main '''categories''':

*'''Uncategorized'''
*and '''Nutrients'''.

Under '''Nutrients'''. we see 3 '''sub-categories''':
*'''Vitamins,'''
*'''Minerals'''
*'''Carbohydrates'''

|-
|| Click on '''Articles'''

||From '''Category Manager''', click on '''Articles''' in the left menu.

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B'''.

||Select the two '''vitamin articles''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

||Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

||A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Articles''' opens.

|-
||Select '''Vitamins''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

||Select '''Vitamins''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
||Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

||Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process''' button.

|-
||Highlight the category

||Notice that the '''category''' for our '''articles Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B''' has changed

|-
||

||Let us change the category of '''Benefits of Sodium''' to '''Minerals'''.

|-
||Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

||Click on the title '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||Select '''Minerals''' in category drop-down.

Click on '''Save and Close'''

||In the '''Category''' drop-down on the right, select '''Minerals''', then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Highlight the '''category'''

||Note that the '''category''' of '''Benefits of Sodium''' has been changed to '''Minerals.'''

|-
||Show Slide 8:

'''Assignment 3.'''

||Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Click on '''Benefits of Nutrients''' article.
*Change the category to '''Nutrients.'''
*Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

||Now it’s time to check all these changes on the '''Digital India''' webpage.
Before that, ensure that '''Show Category''' is set to '''Show''' for the '''articles.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options'''

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar at the top right corner.

|-
||Select '''Show''' in '''Show Category.'''

Select '''Yes''' in '''Link Category.'''

||Set '''Show Category''' to '''Show''' and '''Link Category''' to '''Yes.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, click on the '''Digital India''' link at the top right.

|-
||Highlight the '''Category''' in the articles.

||Notice that the '''articles''' have different '''Category''' names in their '''header.'''

|-
||Click on '''Nutrients'''

||Click on the '''Category Nutrients''' in the '''article''' header of '''Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||Scroll down to highlight the article and subcategories.

||Observe that it lists one '''article''' and 2 '''subcategories''' –
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals.'''

This is how we had organized the '''categories.'''

|-
||Highlight '''Subcategories'''

||Note that the category '''Carbohydrates''' is not visible here.

A '''category''' having neither '''articles''' nor '''subcategories''' is an empty '''Category.'''

And hence it is not visible on the webpage.

|-
||

||Can we relax this restriction?

Let us see how to change the settings to get the empty '''categories''' displayed.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager''' webpage

||Switch to the '''Article Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Categories.'''

||Click on the '''Categories''' in the left menu to go to the '''Category Manager.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options''' button.

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar on right.

|-
||Highlight the title.

||Note that the '''Category Manager Options''' page is the same as '''Article Manager Options.'''

Even the title says '''Article Manager Options.'''

|-
||

||There are tabs in this page to control the settings of '''articles, categories, menus''' etc.

|-
||Click on '''Category''' tab.

||Click on the tab '''Category.'''

|-
||

||The tab will show the settings of the page which shows all '''articles''' under a particular '''category.'''

|-
||Scroll down. Highlight '''Empty Category'''

Select '''Show'''.

||Scroll down to see the option '''Empty Category'''.

Set this as '''Show.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|-
||Switch to '''‘Digital India’''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''‘Digital India’''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Carbohydrates'''

||Look, the '''Carbohydrates''' subcategory is now visible.
|-
||Switch to '''Category Manager''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Category Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Point to '''Carbohydrates'''

||The '''subcategory Carbohydrates''' does not have any '''articles''' under it.

|-
||Point to '''Unpublish''' and then to '''Delete'''.

||We can either:
*Unpublish the '''Category''' or
*Delete it.

Let’s understand the difference between the two options.

|-
||Show Slide 9:

Unpublishing a Category

||When we unpublish a '''category''':
*No new '''article''' can be assigned to that '''category'''.
*All its '''subcategories''' are automatically unpublished.
*Articles under the '''category''' are no longer visible on the website, even if they are published.

|-
||Show Slide 10:

'''Deleting a Category'''

||When we delete a '''category''':
*It is moved to '''Trash''', along with all the '''articles''' under it.
*A deleted '''category''' can be restored again or the same could be trashed permanently.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager'''

||Come back to the '''Category Manager.'''

Since we are not using the '''category Carbohydrates''', let's unpublish it for now.

|-
||Select '''Carbohydrates'''

||Locate the '''category Carbohydrates''' from the ‘Categories’ Manager page.

Now select it by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''Status''' column.

|-
||Click on '''Unpublish'''

||Click on the '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar on top.

|-
||Highlight the message

||Immediately, a success message appears.

|-
||Highlight the status

||Observe that the status of the '''category Carbohydrates''' has changed to '''Unpublished'''.

|-
||

||Let us go back to the '''Digital India''' webpage and verify this.

|-
||Switch to the Digital India webpage. Click '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the subcategory '''Carbohydrates''' is no longer visible.

This is because it has been '''unpublished.'''

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 11:

Summary: Same as narration

||In this tutorial, we learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla'''.
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 12:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:
*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category'''.
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
||Slide 13, 14, 15 & 16:

'''Assignment 4:'''

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Create a new '''category Food Sources'''.
*Create 2 subcategories '''Veg Sources and Non-veg Sources''' under the category '''Food Sources.'''
*Assign the article '''Fish''' to '''Non-Veg''' sources.
*Assign the article '''Green Vegetables''' to '''Veg Sources'''.
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||Assignment 5:

||
*Delete the '''category Veg Sources'''.

*Try to restore it back.

Hint: Use the filter to see '''Trashed categories'''.

|-
||Assignment 6:

||
*Edit the category '''Vitamins''' to add a description.
*Change the settings to show the description and number of articles in a category.
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Categories-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-05T06:52:41Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Categories in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Categories in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla.'''
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category.'''
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*Learner of this tutorial should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, pls refer to the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
||
Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''

|| Click on '''Article Manager''' in the left menu.

|-
||
|| We currently have 2 articles - '''Vitamin A''' and '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| In order to understand categories in '''Joomla''', let’s create a few more articles.

|-
|| Show Slide 6:
Assignment1

Create Articles:
'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''

'''*Fish'''

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|| Pause this tutorial and do this assignment.

*Open the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial.
*Follow the instructions to create 4 new articles:
'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
|| Scroll down to highlight all the articles.

|| We now have 6 '''articles''' in '''Article Manager:'''
'''*Vitamin A'''

'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Sodium'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients '''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
||
|| The 2 articles on '''Vitamins''' are similar in content.

So, we should group them together.

|-
||

|| '''Categories''' in '''Joomla''' helps to organize the articles in a logical order.

|-
|| Click on '''Categories'''

Click on '''Content''' → Hover over '''Category Manager'''

|| Click on '''Categories''' in the left menu.

Alternately, click on '''Content Menu''' at the top and then on '''Category Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Search''' and '''Search Tools'''

|| Notice that the '''Category Manager''' has a similar layout as that of the '''Article Manager.'''

It has a '''Search''' box and '''Search Tools''' button to filter the '''Categories.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Uncategorized.'''

|| By default, we have one '''category''' called '''Uncategorized.'''

Recollect that all our '''articles''' appeared as '''Uncategorized.'''

|-
|| Click on '''New'''

|| To create a new '''category''', click on the '''New''' button on the top left.

|-
||

|| The only mandatory field to create a '''category''' is the '''Category Title.'''

|-
|| Write '''Vitamin''' in the title textbox

|| I will write '''Vitamin''' as the title in the title textbox.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Highlight the new category

|| You can see that the new '''category''' has been now created.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin'''

|| To edit or rename a '''category''', click on the title of the '''category.'''

|-
|| Edit '''Vitamin''' to '''Vitamins'''

|| I will rename the title to '''Vitamins.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save and New'''

|| This time let’s click on '''Save and New''' button.

|-
|| Type '''Minerals''' in the title textbox.
Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Parent''' drop-down

|| We are prompted to add a new '''category.'''

Let’s type '''Minerals''' as the title.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

|| Now, '''Minerals''' and '''Vitamins''' are nutrients that our bodies need.

Let us put them in a broader '''category Nutrients.'''

|-
|| Click on New.
Write '''Nutrients''' in the title textbox.

|| Click on New and type '''Nutrients''' as the title.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
||

|| Let us put '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' under the category '''Nutrients'''.

A '''category''' under another category is called '''subcategory.'''

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals'''

|| Select the two '''categories''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
||

|| We can batch process these 2 categories.

Batch processing means working on things in groups.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

|| Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

|| A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Categories''' opens.

It has many options.

|-
|| Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

|| For now, we are only going to change the '''parent category''' of these '''categories'''.

So, select '''Nutrients''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
|| Highlight '''Copy''' and '''Move'''.

|| There are 2 '''radio buttons''' below the drop-down, namely:
1. '''Copy'''
2. '''Move'''

'''Copy''' will make a copy of the selected '''categories''' in the selected '''category'''.

'''Move''' will move the '''category''' from their previous '''category''' to the selected '''category'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

|| Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process.'''

|-
||Highlight the -

||Notice a hyphen in front of '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' categories. This indicates that they are subcategories of the main category '''Nutrients.'''

|-
||Show Slide 7.

'''Assignment 2.'''

|| Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Create a new '''Category Carbohydrates'''.
*Click on '''Parent''' drop-down on the right and select '''Nutrients'''.
*Click on '''Save and Close'''.
Notice that this is another way to assign '''categories''' and '''subcategories''' to a '''parent category.'''

|-
|| Highlight the category tree.

||Now, we have a '''Category tree.'''

There are 2 main '''categories''':

*'''Uncategorized'''
*and '''Nutrients'''.

Under '''Nutrients'''. we see 3 '''sub-categories''':
*'''Vitamins,'''
*'''Minerals'''
*'''Carbohydrates'''

|-
|| Click on '''Articles'''

||From '''Category Manager''', click on '''Articles''' in the left menu.

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B'''.

||Select the two '''vitamin articles''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

||Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

||A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Articles''' opens.

|-
||Select '''Vitamins''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

||Select '''Vitamins''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
||Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

||Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process''' button.

|-
||Highlight the category

||Notice that the '''category''' for our '''articles Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B''' has changed

|-
||

||Let us change the category of '''Benefits of Sodium''' to '''Minerals'''.

|-
||Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

||Click on the title '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||Select '''Minerals''' in category drop-down.

Click on '''Save and Close'''

||In the '''Category''' drop-down on the right, select '''Minerals''', then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Highlight the '''category'''

||Note that the '''category''' of '''Benefits of Sodium''' has been changed to '''Minerals.'''

|-
||Show Slide 8:

'''Assignment 3.'''

||Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Click on '''Benefits of Nutrients''' article.
*Change the category to '''Nutrients.'''
*Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

||Now it’s time to check all these changes on the '''Digital India''' webpage.
Before that, ensure that '''Show Category''' is set to '''Show''' for the '''articles.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options'''

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar at the top right corner.

|-
||Select '''Show''' in '''Show Category.'''

Select '''Yes''' in '''Link Category.'''

||Set '''Show Category''' to '''Show''' and '''Link Category''' to '''Yes.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, click on the '''Digital India''' link at the top right.

|-
||Highlight the '''Category''' in the articles.

||Notice that the '''articles''' have different '''Category''' names in their '''header.'''

|-
||Click on '''Nutrients'''

||Click on the '''Category Nutrients''' in the '''article''' header of '''Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||Scroll down to highlight the article and subcategories.

||Observe that it lists one '''article''' and 2 '''subcategories''' –
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals.'''

This is how we had organized the '''categories.'''

|-
||Highlight '''Subcategories'''

||Note that the category '''Carbohydrates''' is not visible here.

A '''category''' having neither '''articles''' nor '''subcategories''' is an empty '''Category.'''

And hence it is not visible on the webpage.

|-
||

||Can we relax this restriction?

Let us see how to change the settings to get the empty '''categories''' displayed.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager''' webpage

||Switch to the '''Article Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Categories.'''

||Click on the '''Categories''' in the left menu to go to the '''Category Manager.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options''' button.

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar on right.

|-
||Highlight the title.

||Note that the '''Category Manager Options''' page is the same as '''Article Manager Options.'''

Even the title says '''Article Manager Options.'''

|-
||

||There are tabs in this page to control the settings of '''articles, categories, menus''' etc.

|-
||Click on '''Category''' tab.

||Click on the tab '''Category.'''

|-
||

||The tab will show the settings of the page which shows all '''articles''' under a particular '''category.'''

|-
||Scroll down. Highlight '''Empty Category'''

Select '''Show'''.

||Scroll down to see the option '''Empty Category'''.

Set this as '''Show.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|-
||Switch to '''‘Digital India’''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''‘Digital India’''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Carbohydrates'''

||Look, the '''Carbohydrates''' subcategory is now visible.
|-
||Switch to '''Category Manager''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Category Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Point to '''Carbohydrates'''

||The '''subcategory Carbohydrates''' does not have any '''articles''' under it.

|-
||Point to '''Unpublish''' and then to '''Delete'''.

||We can either:
*Unpublish the '''Category''' or
*Delete it.

Let’s understand the difference between the two options.

|-
||Show Slide 9:

Unpublishing a Category

||When we unpublish a '''category''':
*No new '''article''' can be assigned to that '''category'''.
*All its '''subcategories''' are automatically unpublished.
*Articles under the '''category''' are no longer visible on the website, even if they are published.

|-
||Show Slide 10:

'''Deleting a Category'''

||When we delete a '''category''':
*It is moved to '''Trash''', along with all the '''articles''' under it.
*A deleted '''category''' can be restored again or the same could be trashed permanently.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager'''

||Come back to the '''Category Manager.'''

Since we are not using the '''category Carbohydrates''', let's unpublish it for now.

|-
||Select '''Carbohydrates'''

||Locate the '''category Carbohydrates''' from the ‘Categories’ Manager page.

Now select it by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''Status''' column.

|-
||Click on '''Unpublish'''

||Click on the '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar on top.

|-
||Highlight the message

||Immediately, a success message appears.

|-
||Highlight the status

||Observe that the status of the '''category Carbohydrates''' has changed to '''Unpublished'''.

|-
||

||Let us go back to the '''Digital India''' webpage and verify this.

|-
||Switch to the Digital India webpage. Click '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the subcategory '''Carbohydrates''' is no longer visible.

This is because it has been '''unpublished.'''

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 11:

Summary: Same as narration

||In this tutorial, we learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla'''.
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 12:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:
*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category'''.
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
||Slide 13, 14, 15 & 16:

'''Assignment 4:'''

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Create a new '''category Food Sources'''.
*Create 2 subcategories '''Veg Sources and Non-veg Sources''' under the category '''Food Sources.'''
*Assign the article '''Fish''' to '''Non-Veg''' sources.
*Assign the article '''Green Vegetables''' to '''Veg Sources'''.
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||Assignment 5:

||
*Delete the '''category Veg Sources'''.

*Try to restore it back.

Hint: Use the filter to see '''Trashed categories'''.

|-
||Assignment 6:

||
*Edit the category '''Vitamins''' to add a description.
*Change the settings to show the description and number of articles in a category.
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Categories-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-05T06:51:38Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Categories in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Categories in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla.'''
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category.'''
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*Learner of this tutorial should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, pls refer to the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
||
Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''

|| Click on '''Article Manager''' in the left menu.

|-
||
|| We currently have 2 articles - '''Vitamin A''' and '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| In order to understand categories in '''Joomla''', let’s create a few more articles.

|-
|| Show Slide 6:
Assignment1

Create Articles:
'''*Vitamin B'''
'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''
'''*Fish'''
'''*Green Vegetables'''

|| Pause this tutorial and do this assignment.

*Open the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial.
*Follow the instructions to create 4 new articles:
'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
|| Scroll down to highlight all the articles.

|| We now have 6 '''articles''' in '''Article Manager:'''
'''*Vitamin A'''

'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Sodium'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients '''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
||
|| The 2 articles on '''Vitamins''' are similar in content.

So, we should group them together.

|-
||

|| '''Categories''' in '''Joomla''' helps to organize the articles in a logical order.

|-
|| Click on '''Categories'''

Click on '''Content''' → Hover over '''Category Manager'''

|| Click on '''Categories''' in the left menu.

Alternately, click on '''Content Menu''' at the top and then on '''Category Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Search''' and '''Search Tools'''

|| Notice that the '''Category Manager''' has a similar layout as that of the '''Article Manager.'''

It has a '''Search''' box and '''Search Tools''' button to filter the '''Categories.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Uncategorized.'''

|| By default, we have one '''category''' called '''Uncategorized.'''

Recollect that all our '''articles''' appeared as '''Uncategorized.'''

|-
|| Click on '''New'''

|| To create a new '''category''', click on the '''New''' button on the top left.

|-
||

|| The only mandatory field to create a '''category''' is the '''Category Title.'''

|-
|| Write '''Vitamin''' in the title textbox

|| I will write '''Vitamin''' as the title in the title textbox.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Highlight the new category

|| You can see that the new '''category''' has been now created.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin'''

|| To edit or rename a '''category''', click on the title of the '''category.'''

|-
|| Edit '''Vitamin''' to '''Vitamins'''

|| I will rename the title to '''Vitamins.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save and New'''

|| This time let’s click on '''Save and New''' button.

|-
|| Type '''Minerals''' in the title textbox.
Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Parent''' drop-down

|| We are prompted to add a new '''category.'''

Let’s type '''Minerals''' as the title.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

|| Now, '''Minerals''' and '''Vitamins''' are nutrients that our bodies need.

Let us put them in a broader '''category Nutrients.'''

|-
|| Click on New.
Write '''Nutrients''' in the title textbox.

|| Click on New and type '''Nutrients''' as the title.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
||

|| Let us put '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' under the category '''Nutrients'''.

A '''category''' under another category is called '''subcategory.'''

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals'''

|| Select the two '''categories''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
||

|| We can batch process these 2 categories.

Batch processing means working on things in groups.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

|| Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

|| A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Categories''' opens.

It has many options.

|-
|| Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

|| For now, we are only going to change the '''parent category''' of these '''categories'''.

So, select '''Nutrients''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
|| Highlight '''Copy''' and '''Move'''.

|| There are 2 '''radio buttons''' below the drop-down, namely:
1. '''Copy'''
2. '''Move'''

'''Copy''' will make a copy of the selected '''categories''' in the selected '''category'''.

'''Move''' will move the '''category''' from their previous '''category''' to the selected '''category'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

|| Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process.'''

|-
||Highlight the -

||Notice a hyphen in front of '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' categories. This indicates that they are subcategories of the main category '''Nutrients.'''

|-
||Show Slide 7.

'''Assignment 2.'''

|| Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Create a new '''Category Carbohydrates'''.
*Click on '''Parent''' drop-down on the right and select '''Nutrients'''.
*Click on '''Save and Close'''.
Notice that this is another way to assign '''categories''' and '''subcategories''' to a '''parent category.'''

|-
|| Highlight the category tree.

||Now, we have a '''Category tree.'''

There are 2 main '''categories''':

*'''Uncategorized'''
*and '''Nutrients'''.

Under '''Nutrients'''. we see 3 '''sub-categories''':
*'''Vitamins,'''
*'''Minerals'''
*'''Carbohydrates'''

|-
|| Click on '''Articles'''

||From '''Category Manager''', click on '''Articles''' in the left menu.

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B'''.

||Select the two '''vitamin articles''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

||Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

||A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Articles''' opens.

|-
||Select '''Vitamins''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

||Select '''Vitamins''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
||Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

||Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process''' button.

|-
||Highlight the category

||Notice that the '''category''' for our '''articles Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B''' has changed

|-
||

||Let us change the category of '''Benefits of Sodium''' to '''Minerals'''.

|-
||Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

||Click on the title '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||Select '''Minerals''' in category drop-down.

Click on '''Save and Close'''

||In the '''Category''' drop-down on the right, select '''Minerals''', then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Highlight the '''category'''

||Note that the '''category''' of '''Benefits of Sodium''' has been changed to '''Minerals.'''

|-
||Show Slide 8:

'''Assignment 3.'''

||Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Click on '''Benefits of Nutrients''' article.
*Change the category to '''Nutrients.'''
*Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

||Now it’s time to check all these changes on the '''Digital India''' webpage.
Before that, ensure that '''Show Category''' is set to '''Show''' for the '''articles.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options'''

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar at the top right corner.

|-
||Select '''Show''' in '''Show Category.'''

Select '''Yes''' in '''Link Category.'''

||Set '''Show Category''' to '''Show''' and '''Link Category''' to '''Yes.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, click on the '''Digital India''' link at the top right.

|-
||Highlight the '''Category''' in the articles.

||Notice that the '''articles''' have different '''Category''' names in their '''header.'''

|-
||Click on '''Nutrients'''

||Click on the '''Category Nutrients''' in the '''article''' header of '''Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||Scroll down to highlight the article and subcategories.

||Observe that it lists one '''article''' and 2 '''subcategories''' –
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals.'''

This is how we had organized the '''categories.'''

|-
||Highlight '''Subcategories'''

||Note that the category '''Carbohydrates''' is not visible here.

A '''category''' having neither '''articles''' nor '''subcategories''' is an empty '''Category.'''

And hence it is not visible on the webpage.

|-
||

||Can we relax this restriction?

Let us see how to change the settings to get the empty '''categories''' displayed.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager''' webpage

||Switch to the '''Article Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Categories.'''

||Click on the '''Categories''' in the left menu to go to the '''Category Manager.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options''' button.

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar on right.

|-
||Highlight the title.

||Note that the '''Category Manager Options''' page is the same as '''Article Manager Options.'''

Even the title says '''Article Manager Options.'''

|-
||

||There are tabs in this page to control the settings of '''articles, categories, menus''' etc.

|-
||Click on '''Category''' tab.

||Click on the tab '''Category.'''

|-
||

||The tab will show the settings of the page which shows all '''articles''' under a particular '''category.'''

|-
||Scroll down. Highlight '''Empty Category'''

Select '''Show'''.

||Scroll down to see the option '''Empty Category'''.

Set this as '''Show.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|-
||Switch to '''‘Digital India’''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''‘Digital India’''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Carbohydrates'''

||Look, the '''Carbohydrates''' subcategory is now visible.
|-
||Switch to '''Category Manager''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Category Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Point to '''Carbohydrates'''

||The '''subcategory Carbohydrates''' does not have any '''articles''' under it.

|-
||Point to '''Unpublish''' and then to '''Delete'''.

||We can either:
*Unpublish the '''Category''' or
*Delete it.

Let’s understand the difference between the two options.

|-
||Show Slide 9:

Unpublishing a Category

||When we unpublish a '''category''':
*No new '''article''' can be assigned to that '''category'''.
*All its '''subcategories''' are automatically unpublished.
*Articles under the '''category''' are no longer visible on the website, even if they are published.

|-
||Show Slide 10:

'''Deleting a Category'''

||When we delete a '''category''':
*It is moved to '''Trash''', along with all the '''articles''' under it.
*A deleted '''category''' can be restored again or the same could be trashed permanently.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager'''

||Come back to the '''Category Manager.'''

Since we are not using the '''category Carbohydrates''', let's unpublish it for now.

|-
||Select '''Carbohydrates'''

||Locate the '''category Carbohydrates''' from the ‘Categories’ Manager page.

Now select it by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''Status''' column.

|-
||Click on '''Unpublish'''

||Click on the '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar on top.

|-
||Highlight the message

||Immediately, a success message appears.

|-
||Highlight the status

||Observe that the status of the '''category Carbohydrates''' has changed to '''Unpublished'''.

|-
||

||Let us go back to the '''Digital India''' webpage and verify this.

|-
||Switch to the Digital India webpage. Click '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the subcategory '''Carbohydrates''' is no longer visible.

This is because it has been '''unpublished.'''

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 11:

Summary: Same as narration

||In this tutorial, we learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla'''.
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 12:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:
*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category'''.
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
||Slide 13, 14, 15 & 16:

'''Assignment 4:'''

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Create a new '''category Food Sources'''.
*Create 2 subcategories '''Veg Sources and Non-veg Sources''' under the category '''Food Sources.'''
*Assign the article '''Fish''' to '''Non-Veg''' sources.
*Assign the article '''Green Vegetables''' to '''Veg Sources'''.
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||Assignment 5:

||
*Delete the '''category Veg Sources'''.

*Try to restore it back.

Hint: Use the filter to see '''Trashed categories'''.

|-
||Assignment 6:

||
*Edit the category '''Vitamins''' to add a description.
*Change the settings to show the description and number of articles in a category.
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Categories-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-05T06:13:33Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with "{| border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Show Slide 1:''' '''Categories in Joomla.''' || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Categories in Joomla.''' |-..."

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
'''Categories in Joomla.'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Categories in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla.'''
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category.'''
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*Learner of this tutorial should know how to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, pls refer to the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6'''
Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''

|| Click on '''Article Manager''' in the left menu.

|-
||
|| We currently have 2 articles - '''Vitamin A''' and '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| In order to understand categories in '''Joomla''', let’s create a few more articles.

|-
|| Show Slide 6:
Assignment1

Create Articles:
'''*Vitamin B'''
'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''
'''*Fish'''
'''*Green Vegetables'''

|| Pause this tutorial and do this assignment.

*Open the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial.
*Follow the instructions to create 4 new articles:
'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients'''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
|| Scroll down to highlight all the articles.

|| We now have 6 '''articles''' in '''Article Manager:'''
'''*Vitamin A'''

'''*Vitamin B'''

'''*Benefits of Sodium'''

'''*Benefits of Nutrients '''

'''*Fish''' and

'''*Green Vegetables'''

|-
||
|| The 2 articles on '''Vitamins''' are similar in content.

So, we should group them together.

|-
||

|| '''Categories''' in '''Joomla''' helps to organize the articles in a logical order.

|-
|| Click on '''Categories'''

Click on '''Content''' → Hover over '''Category Manager'''

|| Click on '''Categories''' in the left menu.

Alternately, click on '''Content Menu''' at the top and then on '''Category Manager.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Search''' and '''Search Tools'''

|| Notice that the '''Category Manager''' has a similar layout as that of the '''Article Manager.'''

It has a '''Search''' box and '''Search Tools''' button to filter the '''Categories.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Uncategorized.'''

|| By default, we have one '''category''' called '''Uncategorized.'''

Recollect that all our '''articles''' appeared as '''Uncategorized.'''

|-
|| Click on '''New'''

|| To create a new '''category''', click on the '''New''' button on the top left.

|-
||

|| The only mandatory field to create a '''category''' is the '''Category Title.'''

|-
|| Write '''Vitamin''' in the title textbox

|| I will write '''Vitamin''' as the title in the title textbox.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
|| Highlight the new category

|| You can see that the new '''category''' has been now created.

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin'''

|| To edit or rename a '''category''', click on the title of the '''category.'''

|-
|| Edit '''Vitamin''' to '''Vitamins'''

|| I will rename the title to '''Vitamins.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save and New'''

|| This time let’s click on '''Save and New''' button.

|-
|| Type '''Minerals''' in the title textbox.
Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Parent''' drop-down

|| We are prompted to add a new '''category.'''

Let’s type '''Minerals''' as the title.

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

|| Now, '''Minerals''' and '''Vitamins''' are nutrients that our bodies need.

Let us put them in a broader '''category Nutrients.'''

|-
|| Click on New.
Write '''Nutrients''' in the title textbox.

|| Click on New and type '''Nutrients''' as the title.

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Then click on '''Save and Close'''.

|-
||

|| Let us put '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' under the category '''Nutrients'''.

A '''category''' under another category is called '''subcategory.'''

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals'''

|| Select the two '''categories''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
||

|| We can batch process these 2 categories.

Batch processing means working on things in groups.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

|| Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

|| A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Categories''' opens.

It has many options.

|-
|| Select '''Nutrients''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

|| For now, we are only going to change the '''parent category''' of these '''categories'''.

So, select '''Nutrients''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
|| Highlight '''Copy''' and '''Move'''.

|| There are 2 '''radio buttons''' below the drop-down, namely:
1. '''Copy'''
2. '''Move'''

'''Copy''' will make a copy of the selected '''categories''' in the selected '''category'''.

'''Move''' will move the '''category''' from their previous '''category''' to the selected '''category'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

|| Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process.'''

|-
||Highlight the -

||Notice a hyphen in front of '''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals''' categories. This indicates that they are subcategories of the main category '''Nutrients.'''

|-
||Show Slide 7.

'''Assignment 2.'''

|| Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Create a new '''Category Carbohydrates'''.
*Click on '''Parent''' drop-down on the right and select '''Nutrients'''.
*Click on '''Save and Close'''.
Notice that this is another way to assign '''categories''' and '''subcategories''' to a '''parent category.'''

|-
|| Highlight the category tree.

||Now, we have a '''Category tree.'''

There are 2 main '''categories''':

*'''Uncategorized'''
*and '''Nutrients'''.

Under '''Nutrients'''. we see 3 '''sub-categories''':
*'''Vitamins,'''
*'''Minerals'''
*'''Carbohydrates'''

|-
|| Click on '''Articles'''

||From '''Category Manager''', click on '''Articles''' in the left menu.

|-
|| Click on check-box next to '''Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B'''.

||Select the two '''vitamin articles''' by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''status''' column.

|-
|| Click on '''Batch'''

||Click on '''Batch''' button in the toolbar at the top.

|-
||

||A new window with the title '''Batch Process the Selected Articles''' opens.

|-
||Select '''Vitamins''' in '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down

||Select '''Vitamins''' in the '''Select Category for Move/ Copy''' drop-down.

|-
||Click on '''Move''' radio button >> Click on '''Process'''.

||Let's select '''Move''' and then click on '''Process''' button.

|-
||Highlight the category

||Notice that the '''category''' for our '''articles Vitamin A''' and '''Vitamin B''' has changed

|-
||

||Let us change the category of '''Benefits of Sodium''' to '''Minerals'''.

|-
||Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

||Click on the title '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||Select '''Minerals''' in category drop-down.

Click on '''Save and Close'''

||In the '''Category''' drop-down on the right, select '''Minerals''', then click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Highlight the '''category'''

||Note that the '''category''' of '''Benefits of Sodium''' has been changed to '''Minerals.'''

|-
||Show Slide 8:

'''Assignment 3.'''

||Pause the tutorial here and do this assignment.
*Click on '''Benefits of Nutrients''' article.
*Change the category to '''Nutrients.'''
*Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||

||Now it’s time to check all these changes on the '''Digital India''' webpage.
Before that, ensure that '''Show Category''' is set to '''Show''' for the '''articles.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options'''

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar at the top right corner.

|-
||Select '''Show''' in '''Show Category.'''

Select '''Yes''' in '''Link Category.'''

||Set '''Show Category''' to '''Show''' and '''Link Category''' to '''Yes.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

||Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, click on the '''Digital India''' link at the top right.

|-
||Highlight the '''Category''' in the articles.

||Notice that the '''articles''' have different '''Category''' names in their '''header.'''

|-
||Click on '''Nutrients'''

||Click on the '''Category Nutrients''' in the '''article''' header of '''Benefits of Nutrients'''.

|-
||Scroll down to highlight the article and subcategories.

||Observe that it lists one '''article''' and 2 '''subcategories''' –
'''Vitamins''' and '''Minerals.'''

This is how we had organized the '''categories.'''

|-
||Highlight '''Subcategories'''

||Note that the category '''Carbohydrates''' is not visible here.

A '''category''' having neither '''articles''' nor '''subcategories''' is an empty '''Category.'''

And hence it is not visible on the webpage.

|-
||

||Can we relax this restriction?

Let us see how to change the settings to get the empty '''categories''' displayed.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager''' webpage

||Switch to the '''Article Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Click on '''Categories.'''

||Click on the '''Categories''' in the left menu to go to the '''Category Manager.'''

|-
||Click on '''Options''' button.

||Click on '''Options''' button in the toolbar on right.

|-
||Highlight the title.

||Note that the '''Category Manager Options''' page is the same as '''Article Manager Options.'''

Even the title says '''Article Manager Options.'''

|-
||

||There are tabs in this page to control the settings of '''articles, categories, menus''' etc.

|-
||Click on '''Category''' tab.

||Click on the tab '''Category.'''

|-
||

||The tab will show the settings of the page which shows all '''articles''' under a particular '''category.'''

|-
||Scroll down. Highlight '''Empty Category'''

Select '''Show'''.

||Scroll down to see the option '''Empty Category'''.

Set this as '''Show.'''

|-
||Click on '''Save and Close'''

||Click on '''Save and Close'''

|-
||Switch to '''‘Digital India’''' webpage. Press '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''‘Digital India’''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Carbohydrates'''

||Look, the '''Carbohydrates''' subcategory is now visible.
|-
||Switch to '''Category Manager''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Category Manager''' webpage.

|-
||Point to '''Carbohydrates'''

||The '''subcategory Carbohydrates''' does not have any '''articles''' under it.

|-
||Point to '''Unpublish''' and then to '''Delete'''.

||We can either:
*Unpublish the '''Category''' or
*Delete it.

Let’s understand the difference between the two options.

|-
||Show Slide 9:

Unpublishing a Category

||When we unpublish a '''category''':
*No new '''article''' can be assigned to that '''category'''.
*All its '''subcategories''' are automatically unpublished.
*Articles under the '''category''' are no longer visible on the website, even if they are published.

|-
||Show Slide 10:

'''Deleting a Category'''

||When we delete a '''category''':
*It is moved to '''Trash''', along with all the '''articles''' under it.
*A deleted '''category''' can be restored again or the same could be trashed permanently.

|-
||Switch to '''Article Manager'''

||Come back to the '''Category Manager.'''

Since we are not using the '''category Carbohydrates''', let's unpublish it for now.

|-
||Select '''Carbohydrates'''

||Locate the '''category Carbohydrates''' from the ‘Categories’ Manager page.

Now select it by clicking the check-box to the left of the '''Status''' column.

|-
||Click on '''Unpublish'''

||Click on the '''Unpublish''' button in the toolbar on top.

|-
||Highlight the message

||Immediately, a success message appears.

|-
||Highlight the status

||Observe that the status of the '''category Carbohydrates''' has changed to '''Unpublished'''.

|-
||

||Let us go back to the '''Digital India''' webpage and verify this.

|-
||Switch to the Digital India webpage. Click '''F5'''

||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||

||Notice that the subcategory '''Carbohydrates''' is no longer visible.

This is because it has been '''unpublished.'''

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarize.

|-
||Switch to Slide 11:

Summary: Same as narration

||In this tutorial, we learn about:

*'''Category Manager''' in '''Joomla'''.
*Creating and editing '''categories'''
*And creating '''sub-categories'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 12:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:
*Assign '''articles''' to '''categories'''
*Move or copy '''articles''' to a different '''category'''.
*And delete or unpublish a '''category.'''

|-
||Slide 13, 14, 15 & 16:

'''Assignment 4:'''

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Create a new '''category Food Sources'''.
*Create 2 subcategories '''Veg Sources and Non-veg Sources''' under the category '''Food Sources.'''
*Assign the article '''Fish''' to '''Non-Veg''' sources.
*Assign the article '''Green Vegetables''' to '''Veg Sources'''.
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||Assignment 5:

||
*Delete the '''category Veg Sources'''.

*Try to restore it back.

Hint: Use the filter to see '''Trashed categories'''.

|-
||Assignment 6:

||
*Edit the category '''Vitamins''' to add a description.
*Change the settings to show the description and number of articles in a category.
*Refresh the '''Homepage.'''
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Formatting-article-in-Joomla/English

2016-02-01T09:46:26Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with "{| border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Show Slide 1:''' Formatting Articles in Joomla. || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Basic Formatting of Articl..."

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
Formatting Articles in Joomla.
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Basic Formatting of Articles in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
Learning Objectives:
Same as narration
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*'''Article''' editor in '''Joomla.'''
*Basic formatting for an '''article'''
*And styling an '''article''' text

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Learning Objectives continued:
Same as narration
|| We will also learn how to:

*Insert '''lists'''
*Insert a '''page break''' and
*Insert '''Read More''' link in articles.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*You should know how to create '''articles''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, check the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6'''
Prior Knowledge

|| Earlier, we learnt to create, edit, copy and delete an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''.
Now, let’s learn how to format '''articles.'''

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla control panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''
|| Click on '''Article Manager. '''
Here are the articles we created earlier:
'''*“Benefits of Sodium”''' and
'''*“Vitamin A”'''

|-
||

|| Let us view them on the '''Digital India''' webpage.

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top right of the page.

|-
||

|| We can see both our '''articles''' here.

|-
|| Click on “Benefits of Sodium”
|| Click on '''Benefits of Sodium.'''

|-
||

|| We can see the '''article''' is not formatted.

|-
|| Click on the '''admin panel''' webpage in the browser.

Click on '''Benefits of Sodium'''

|| Let’s go back to the '''Article Manager.'''

Click on the article title '''“Benefits of Sodium”.'''

|-
|| Point to the editor

|| The editor in which we type the text of the '''article''', is called a '''WYSIWYG editor.'''

|-
|| While editing, this text can appear on the screen:
'''WYSIWYG : 'What You See Is What You Get'.'''

|| '''WYSIWYG''' is the abbreviation of ''''What You See Is What You Get'.'''

|-
||

|| It means the '''article''' looks the same in the web page as seen in the editing window.

|-
|| Point to the menu bar in the editor

|| Look at the menu bar of the editor now.

|-
|| Point to some options in the first row.

Now click on any 2 for demo

|| The first row has drop-down menus, which have various formatting options.

You can see the sub-options when you click on them.

|-
|| Point to some options in the 2nd row.

|| The second row has sets of formatting options.

|-
|| Point to each icon in the first set

|| So here, we see a set of text enhancement options like

'''Bold, Italics, Underline''' and '''Strikethrough. '''

|-
|| Point to each icon in the second set

|| Next, we see the options to align the text to the '''left, centre, right''' and '''justify'''.

|-
||

|| These work as in any other text editor.

|-
|| Point to '''Paragraph''' button

|| After the alignment options, we can see a button named '''Paragraph.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Paragraph'''

|| When we click on it, we can see various options like '''Heading 1, Heading 2''', etc.

These are pre-set options provided by '''Joomla''' for formatting purposes.

|-
||'''Show Slide 7''': Headings in Joomla

|| '''Headings''' are very useful in making text easier to read on the screen.

'''Headings''' also define the hierarchy of importance.

|-
|| Highlight '''Heading 1'''
Highlight '''Heading 6'''

|| '''Heading 1''' defines the most important heading and '''Heading 6''' is the least important.

|-
|| Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage.

Highlight '''Home.'''

|| Switch to '''Digital India''' webpage.

Here, the text '''Home''' is in '''Heading 1.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Benefits of Sodium'''

|| The title of an '''article''' in '''Joomla''' is in '''Heading 2.'''

|-
|| Highlight '''Main Menu, Login Form'''

|| Other headings, like '''Main Menu''' and '''Login Form''' are in '''Heading 3'''.

|-
||

|| Notice that the font size keeps decreasing with levels of '''headings.'''

|-
|| Switch back to '''Edit Article''' webpage

|| Switch to the '''Edit Article webpage.'''

|-
||

|| Let us add one section on food sources of '''Sodium.'''

|-
|| Point the cursor to the end of the '''article'''>> Press '''Enter'''.

|| At the end of the '''article''' text, click '''Enter''' to begin a new paragraph.

|-
|| Type: '''Food Sources''':
Salt
Processed Food
Canned Food

|| Type '''Food Sources:''' as the heading.

We will type 3 sources here –
'''Salt, Processed Food''' and '''Canned Food'''.

|-
|| Select '''Food Sources''' >> Click on '''Paragraph''' button>> Select '''Heading 4'''

|| Select the text '''Food Sources:''' and in the Paragraph drop-down, select '''Heading 4'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Save'''

|| Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Switch to the webpage and press '''F5'''

|| Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh the page.

|-
||Highlight '''Food Sources'''

|| Notice that the text '''Food Sources''' appears in bold.

|-
|| Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage

||Go back to '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
|| Type: '''Let’s look at some sources of sodium'''

||Next to the heading '''Food Sources''', add the text -
'''Let’s look at some food sources of sodium.'''

|-
|| Point to the added text

||Here, we have added the text in the same paragraph.

The newly added text becomes part of the heading and is formatted as '''Heading 4.'''

|-
||

||Please note that the:

Header formatting applies to the entire paragraph and not to particular words.

|-
|| Press '''Enter'''.

||To separate this line from the heading, press '''Enter''' before the newly added text.

|-
||Select the text >> Click on '''Paragraph''' button→ '''Paragraph'''

||Then select the text and from the '''Paragraph''' drop-down select the option '''Paragraph'''.

The text is no longer in '''Heading 4''' format.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Place the cursor at the top of the page >>
Type '''Chemical Symbol of Sodium is Na'''

||Let me add a text line at the top of the page:
'''“Chemical Symbol of Sodium is Na.”'''

|-
||Select the new text line. Click on '''Paragraph → Pre'''.

||Select the text line and then from the '''Paragraph''' drop-down button select '''Pre'''.

|-
||Highlight the text line

||The '''Pre''' option is for preformatted text.

Preformatted text is displayed in fixed width font, and preserves both spaces and line breaks.

|-
||Click on '''Save'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and press '''F5'''

||Go to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

Notice that the newly added text appears in a grey box.

It also appears in a different font and style.

|-
||Highlight the new text line

||'''Pre''' style is usually used for text that needs to stand out in an '''article'''.

This could be poetic stanza, computer code, quotes etc.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article'''.

||Switch to the '''Edit Article''' webpage again.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Point to the list options.

||Next, we have the '''bulleted list''' and '''numbered list''' options.

Let us see how to use them.

|-
||Select the last 3 lines

||Select the last 3 line items in the '''article''' text.

|-
||Click on bulleted list >> click on '''Save''' button

||Now click on '''bullet list''' icon and then click on '''Save''' button.

|-
||Refresh the '''Homepage'''

||Refresh the '''Website''' to see the bulleted list in the '''article Benefits of Sodium'''.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Click on '''Edit Article''' webpage.

||Come back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Point the 3rd row icons one by one.

||The third row has some advanced formatting options like:

*Decrease and increase '''indent'''
*'''Un-do''' and '''Redo'''
*'''Insert links, images, tables''', etc.
*'''Superscript, subscript and special characters'''

You can try these on your own and see how they work.

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

|-
||

||Let’s look at our '''article''' again.

|-
||Point to the article sections '''health benefits of sodium''' and '''sources of sodium'''

||Here we have 2 sections:
*Text about introduction of sodium and its benefits and
*'''Food Sources.'''

Let’s separate these two sections using a horizontal line.

|-
||Point the cursor before '''Sources of Sodium''' text.

Click on '''Horizontal Line''' icon.

||Keep the cursor before the text '''Food Sources'''.

Now click on the '''Horizontal Line''' icon in the formatting menu bar.

This will insert a horizontal line.

|-
||Click on Save button >> Switch to the webpage and press F5

||'''Save''' and refresh the webpage.

We can see the changes in the '''article “Benefits of Sodium”'''.

|-
||

||Instead of inserting a horizontal line, why not put these 2 sections in 2 different pages?

Let’s try doing that.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage.

||Go back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Click on the horizontal line >> Press '''Backspace''' key.

||First we will remove the horizontal line.

So click on it and then press the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.

|-
||Place the cursor at the point

||Now place the cursor at the point where we want to insert the '''Page Break'''.

|-
||Scroll down >> Locate '''Page Break''' button >> Click on it

||Scroll down and locate the '''Page Break''' button at the bottom of the editor window.

Click on it.

|-
||

||It will open an '''Insert Pagebreak''' dialog box.

|-
||'''Page Title: Sources'''

Table of Contents: Sources of Sodium

||Enter '''Sources''' as '''Page Title''' and '''Food Sources of Sodium''' as '''Table of Contents Alias'''.

|-
||Click on '''Insert Page Break''' button >> Point to the zig-zag line between the two sections.

||Click on '''Insert Page Break''' button.

You will see a zig-zag line between the two sections.

|-
||Click on '''Save''' button >> Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and press '''F5'''

||Click on '''Save''' button.

Switch to the '''Digital India''' webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Page 1 of 2.'''

||This page says '''Page 1 of 2'''.
|-
||Highlight '''Prev''' and '''Next.'''

||There are '''Prev''' and '''Next''' buttons below the '''article''' text.

|-
||Highlight block on the right.

||A new block has appeared on the right.

It helps us navigate to the various pages of the particular '''article'''.

|-
||Point to the Title in the block on the right

||The title of the 2nd page is the '''Table of Contents Alias''' we typed earlier…..

i.e. '''Food Sources of Sodium'''

|-
||Click on '''Next''' button.

||Click on the '''Next''' button.

|-
||Highlight '''Page 2 of 2'''.

||Now, the page says '''Page 2 of 2'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Sources''' in '''Benefits of sodium - Sources'''

||Notice the '''Page Title''' that we typed in the '''Insert Pagebreak''' field.

|-
||Continue the highlight and point to the Title

||It has been appended to the title of the '''article'''.

<<PAUSE>>

|-
||Click on '''Digital India'''

||Now, let’s click on the '''Digital India''' link to go back to our website’s '''Homepage'''.

|-
||Scroll down to show the '''article Benefits of Sodium.'''

||Scroll down to see the '''article Benefits of Sodium'''.

Notice here that the full '''article''' text is displayed on the '''Homepage'''.

|-
||

||Let us explore how to add a '''Read More''' option here.

This option will show only a part of the '''article''' on the '''Homepage'''.

|-
||On the '''Homepage''', point to the text:
'''Daily consumption of…….. '''

||For this '''article''', I’ll insert a '''Read More''' link before the text:
Daily consumption of sodium, however, depends on a number of factors.

|-
||Switch to '''Edit Article''' webpage

||Go back to the '''Edit Article''' webpage.

|-
||Place the cursor before '''Daily consumption of …..'''

||Place the cursor at the point where you want to insert the '''Read More''' link.

|-
||Click on '''Read More''' button.

||Now, at the bottom, click on the '''Read More''' button next to the '''Page Break''' button.

|-
||Click on '''Save''' button.

||Scroll up and click on the '''Save''' button.

Switch to the webpage and refresh it.

|-
||Highlight '''Read More: Benefits of sodium'''

||We can see the '''Read More''' link below the '''article''' text here.

|-
||Click on '''Read More: Benefits of sodium'''

||When we click on it, the '''article Benefits of Sodium''' opens.

And it will display the full '''article''' in 2 pages, just as we had set it earlier.

|-
||

||<<PAUSE>>

Let us summarise.

|-
||Switch to Slide 8:

'''Summary: Same as narration'''

||In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Article''' editor in '''Joomla'''.
*Basic formatting of an '''article'''
*Styling an '''article''' text

|-
||Switch to Slide 9:

Same as narration

||We also learnt how to:

*Insert '''Lists'''
*Insert '''Page Break''' and
*Insert '''Read More''' in '''articles'''.

|-
||Slide 10 & 11:

Assignment

||Here is an assignment for you:

*Modify the 4 health benefits of '''sodium''' as a numbered list.
*Center align the heading '''Food Sources'''.
*Remove the '''Read More''' link and put it just before '''Food Sources'''
*Add the text '''Melting Point 97.72 °C''' as pre-formatted text along with the current pre-formatted text.
Hint: Use special characters to get the text '''°C''' in the '''article'''.
*Save the '''article.'''
*Refresh the '''Homepage'''.
*Observe the changes and understand what has happened.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Article-Options-in-Joomla/English

2015-05-07T06:08:39Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with "{| border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Show Slide 1:''' Article Options in Joomla || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Article Options in Joomla.'''..."

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
Article Options in Joomla
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Article Options in Joomla.'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
'''Learning Objectives'''
*Status of an '''article.'''
*Publishing options in '''article'''
*Global options in '''articles.'''

|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

*Status of an '''article'''
*Publishing Options for an '''article''' and
*Global Options for '''Articles'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
'''Versions and OS'''

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 3.4.1
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 5.5.19

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
'''Prerequisites'''

|| To follow this tutorial:
*Ensure that you know how to create '''articles''' in '''Joomla'''
*If not, check the relevant '''Joomla''' tutorials on the '''Spoken Tutorial''' website.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
Prior Knowledge

|| Earlier, we learnt to create, edit, copy and delete an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''.
Now, let’s learn some other options for these '''articles'''.

|-
|| Switch to the browser with '''Joomla Control Panel''' open.

|| Let’s switch to the '''Joomla administration panel.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Article Manager'''

|| Click on '''Article Manager. '''
Here are our previously created '''articles''':
'''*“Benefits of Sodium”''' and
'''*“Vitamin A”'''

|-
||

|| Let us check if they are visible on the '''homepage.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Digital India'''

|| Click on '''Digital India''' at the top right of the page.

|-
|| Point to '''“Benefits of Sodium”'''

|| You can see '''“Benefits of Sodium”''' here but not '''“Vitamin A”.'''
Why is this so?
This is because we had made '''“Benefits of Sodium”''' a '''featured article.'''

|-
|| Click on the '''admin panel''' tab in the browser.
|| Let us now make the '''article “Vitamin A”''' also as '''featured.'''
Go back to '''Article Manager admin page.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Featured''' star.

|| Click the '''Featured''' attribute, i.e, the star in the featured column, for the '''article “Vitamin A”.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Featured''' star again.

|| Let me undo this change by clicking on the '''Featured''' attribute once again.

|-
|| Click on the 1st column checkbox >> then on '''Featured''' button in top menu

|| We can also '''feature''' an '''article''' by:
*checking the checkbox in the first column to the left of the '''article title'''
*and then clicking on '''Featured''' button in the top menu.

|-
|| Highlight the yellow star.

|| Notice that the yellow star has appeared in the '''featured''' column.

|-
|| Click on the homepage tab in the browser. Press '''F5'''.

|| Now, switch to the '''Digital India''' homepage tab and press '''F5''' to refresh it.
We can see that both the '''articles''' are visible now.

|-
|| Click on the admin panel tab in the browser.

|| Let us get back to the '''Article Manager admin''' page.
We will now learn a few more '''Article attributes.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Vitamin A'''

|| Click on the '''article “Vitamin A”''' to reach the '''Edit Article''' page.

|-
|| Point to '''Status''' >> Click on the dropdown >> Scroll-highlight the option one by one.

|| Here is a field named '''Status.''' What does it indicate?

|-
|| Scroll to '''Published'''

|| Whenever an '''article''' is created, the status takes the default value '''“Published”. '''

|-
|| Click on Homepage tab in the browser.

|| A '''featured''' article is displayed on a website because its status is '''Published.'''
So are our two '''articles''', as of now.

|-
|| Click on the admin panel tab in the browser.

|| What happens if the status of an '''article''' to '''Unpublished?'''
Switch back to the '''Article Manager admin''' page.
We are in the '''Edit Article''' of '''“Vitamin A”.'''

|-
|| Select '''Unpublished''' from the dropdown.

|| Let us change the status of our article '''“Vitamin A”''' to '''Unpublished. '''

|-
|| Click on '''Save and Close.'''

|| Click on the '''Save & Close''' button.

|-
||Click on homepage tab in the browser. Press '''F5.'''

|| Switch to the '''homepage''' tab and refresh the page.
Notice that the '''article “Vitamin A”''' is no longer visible here.
<PAUSE>

|-
|| Click on the admin panel tab in the browser.

|| Switch to the '''admin panel''' again.

|-
||

|| Let us learn about the third value of '''Status''', i.e. '''Archived.'''

|-
|| Point to '''“Benefits of Sodium”'''

|| For a change, let's now modify the status of '''“Benefits of Sodium”''' to '''Archived.'''

|-
|| Click on the checkbox next to the '''“Benefits of Sodium”'''

|| Click on the title '''“Benefits of Sodium”.'''

|-
|| Click on the '''Select Status''' dropdown

|| Now click on the '''Status''' drop-down and set the '''Status''' to '''Archived.'''

|-
|| Point to the '''Article''' list.

|| '''“Benefits of Sodium”''' has now been removed from the '''Articles''' list of '''Article Manager'''.

|-
|| Switch to the Homepage tab

|| Verify that it is also no longer displayed on the '''homepage''', either.
So where has the '''article''' gone?

|-
|| Come back to the '''Article Manager'''.

|| Come back to the '''Article Manager.'''

|-
||

|| To view '''archived articles''', we will need to use a filter.

|-
|| Click on '''Search Tools'''

|| To the right of search box, we can see '''Search Tools''' button.
Click on it. It will show a number of search filters.

|-
|| Click on '''Select Status'''

|| Click on the '''Select Status''' filter.

|-
||Select '''Archived''' in the filter.
Point to '''“Benefits of Sodium”'''

|| Let's set the filter to '''Archived.'''
Now we can see our '''article “Benefits of Sodium”''' listed here.

|-
||Switch to Slide 6.

|| An '''article''' when archived becomes a part of the historical data.
You can re-publish it whenever required.

|-
|| Switch back to admin page

||The status of an '''archived article''' can be directly set to '''Unpublished''' or '''Published''', as well.

|-
|| Hover the mouse over the '''Status''' column so that the information text is seen.

||To do so, first hover the mouse over the '''Status''' column, as shown.
You can see a small tooltip here, which says '''“Unpublish Item”'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Unpublish Item''' icon

||Click on the left icon in the '''Status''' column.

|-
|| Scroll down to see that no articles are visible.

||Notice that we cannot see the '''article''' now.

|-
|| Point to the '''Status''' filter.

||This is because the '''Status''' filter is still set to '''Archived'''.

|-
||Click on '''Clear'''.

||Let’s remove the filter by clicking on the '''Clear''' button next to '''Search Tools'''.

|-
||Scroll down to see '''“Benefits of Sodium” article'''

||We can now see the '''article “Benefits of Sodium”''' listed here.

|-
||Point to the red cross.

||Notice that the '''status''' icon has now changed.

|-
||Hover the mouse over the '''Status''' column so that the information text is seen

||The newly acquired status indicates that the '''article''' is now ready for publishing.

|-
||Click on the '''Select Status''' dropdown >> Change the status back to '''All'''.

||In a similar manner, you can get the list of Published, Unpublished and Trashed articles.

|-
||

||Let me first change the status of the '''article “Benefits of Sodium”''' back to '''Archived'''.

|-
||Click on the checkbox-> Click on '''Archive''' button.

||Click on the checkbox to the left of the title. Now click on the '''Archive''' button in the toolbar on top.

|-
||Come to '''Article Manager''' page

||An '''Archived''' or '''Unpublished article''' can still be viewed and edited in the '''Article Manager'''.

|-
||Change the status back to '''Archived''' as done earlier.

||Let’s change the '''status''' filter back to '''Archived'''.

|-
||Click on '''“Benefits of Sodium” ''' >> append the sentence

||Click on the archived '''article “Benefits of Sodium”.'''
Let’s append this sentence at the end of given text.
'''“The daily consumption of sodium, however, depends on a number of factors.”'''

|-
||Select '''Published''' from the dropdown>>Click on '''Save & Close'''

||I will change the status of this '''article''' from '''Archived''' to '''Published.'''

Then click on '''Save & Close.'''

|-
||Select '''All''' in '''Select Status''' filter.

||Let us now select '''All''' in '''Select Status''' filter.

|-
||Scroll down to see the articles.

||This will show all the '''articles''', irrespective of their status.

|-
||Point to the '''article “Sodium”'''

||Notice the status of all the '''articles''' here.
Also notice the '''article “Sodium”''' that we had deleted or trashed in the earlier tutorial.
Explore whether you can change its status on your own.

|-
||Point to the filters one by one.

||The other available filters here are '''Category, Levels, Access, Author, Language''' and '''Tag.'''
We will learn about them in later tutorials.

|-
||Click on '''Vitamin A'''

||Let's move ahead. <PAUSE>
Click on '''“Vitamin A”''' from '''articles''' list.

|-
||Click on '''Status''' dropdown and select '''Published'''.
Point to '''Publishing''' tab.

||We are in the '''Edit Article''' page.
Let’s change the status of the '''article''' to '''Published'''.
On the right of the '''Content''' tab, we can see the tab '''Publishing'''.

|-
||Click on '''Publishing tab'''

||Click on it.
This records the meta-data of the '''article'''.
We will look at some of the important ones.

|-
||Point to '''Created By'''

||The option '''Created by''', displays the name of the creator.
In our case it is '''Super User'''.
We will learn to change it by using '''Select User''' button later.

|-
||Point to '''Created Date, Start Publishing''' and '''Finish Publishing'''.

||Notice 3 different date fields here-
'''1. Created Date'''
'''2. Start Publishing'''
'''3. Finish Publishing'''

|-
||Highlight '''Created Date'''

||'''Created Date''' by default, is the date on which the '''article''' was created.

|-
||Highlight '''Start Publishing'''

||'''Start Publishing''' is the date on which the '''article''' will be published or made visible on the homepage.
That means, the date from which its status will be automatically set to '''Published'''.
By default, this date is set to the '''Created Date'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Finish Publishing'''

||'''Finish Publishing''' is the date on which the '''article''' will cease to be visible on the homepage.
That means, the date from which its status will be automatically set to '''Unpublished'''.

|-
||Point to the blank date field

||By default,it is set to blank.
it means an '''article''' is available forever, by default.

|-
||Point to '''Created Date''' and then to '''Start Publishing'''

||Notice here, that '''Created Date''' and '''Start Publishing''' date are the same.

|-
||Point to the calendar icon.

||To change these dates, open the '''calendar''' by clicking the '''calendar''' icon, on the extreme right.

|-
||Click the calendar icon >> Select 07 April 2015 >> Click on the '''Save & Close''' icon.

||Let me change the '''Created Date''' to today’s date: 07 April 2015.
Click on the '''Save & Close''' button.

|-
||Switch to the Homepage and press '''F5''' >> point to the date.

||Go to the '''homepage''' and refresh it.
The date of creation of the '''article''' is now 07 April 2015.

|-
||'''Slide 7, 8, 9 & 10:'''

||Here are 2 small assignments for you.

'''Assignment 1'''
1. Open the calendar of '''Start Publishing''' date.
2. Select the date as a future date.
3. Save the changes.
4. Go to the Homepage and refresh it.
5. Check the '''article''' list and understand what has happened.

'''Assignment 2'''
1. Now come back and change the date to a date prior to the '''Creation Date'''.
2. Once again, save the changes and observe the changes on the '''Homepage.'''
3. Understand what has happened.
|-
||

||Before exploring further, let us learn a few more details regarding an '''article'''.

|-
||Switch to homepage tab.
Highlight the header information.

||Switch to '''homepage''' and refresh it.
All the '''articles''' are listed here, along with their details in the header.

|-
||Highlight the Article Titles.

||What exactly has been shown?

|-
||Click on '''Vitamin A'''

||Observe that '''Title''' of the '''article''' is clickable. Let me click on '''Vitamin A'''.
Now the article '''Vitamin A''' has opened on a full page.

|-
||Point to '''Next''' at the bottom

||At the bottom, there is a link to the '''Next article'''.

|-
||Point to '''Uncategorised''' >> Click on it.

||Category of this '''article''' says it is '''Uncategorised''' and this is also a hyperlink.
I will click on '''Uncategorised.'''

|-
||List of '''Uncategorised articles'''

||And now we are re-directed to a page with all '''articles''' belonging to the category '''Uncategorised'''.

|-
||Point to both the '''articles'''

||Here are our '''articles''' and they are both '''Uncategorised''', by default.

|-
||Point to header information.

||Let us now see how we can remove this '''header information''' from all the '''articles'''.

|-
||Click on '''Options''' button.

||Come back to the '''Article Manager''' page.
Here click on the '''Options''' button in the toolbar, towards the extreme right.

|-
||Highlight the title '''Article Manager Options'''.

||It will open another page with the title '''“Article Manager Options”'''.

|-
||Point to buttons on the left.

||On the top left, are options to '''Save, Save & Close''' and '''Cancel''' the changes made on this window.

|-
||

||These settings are '''global''' options and apply to all '''articles''', unless changed specifically.

|-
||Highlight '''Show Title'''.

||'''Show Title''' shows the '''Title''' of the '''article'''.

|-
||Click on the button '''Hide'''. Click on '''Save'''.

||By default, it is set to '''Show.'''

Let's set it to '''Hide''' and click on '''Save'''.

|-
||Go to the '''homepage''' tab in the browser. Press '''F5'''.

||Go to the '''homepage''' tab and refresh the page.

|-
||

||Notice that the '''Title''' is no longer visible.

|-
||Go to the admin panel tab in the browser.

||Go back to the '''admin panel'''.

|-
||Set '''Show Title''' to '''Show'''.

||Set '''Show Title''' to '''Show'''.

|-
||Select button '''Hide''' for '''Linked titles'''.

||Next let’s set '''Linked Titles''' as '''No'''.
This will remove the '''Title hyperlink'''.

|-
||Highlight '''Show Intro Text.'''

||We will skip '''Show Intro text '''option for now.

|-
||Highlight '''Show Category'''.
Highlight '''Link Category.'''

||'''Show Category''' and '''Link Category'''
* show the '''category''' in the header
* and also makes it a hyperlink.

|-
||Select button '''Hide''' for '''Show Category'''.
Select button '''No''' for '''Link Category.'''
Click on '''Save.'''

||Let's choose
* '''Hide''' option for '''Show Category'''
* and '''No''' option for '''Linked Category.'''

|-
||Go to the '''homepage''' tab in the browser. Press '''F5'''.
Highlight the title.

||Go to the '''homepage''' tab and refresh the page.
Observe that the '''category''' information is no longer visible.
And the '''Title''' is no longer a '''hyperlink'''.

|-
||Go to the admin panel tab in the browser.

||Go back to the '''admin panel.'''

|-
||Scroll down to the last section.

||Now scroll down to see the last section of the '''settings''' window.
These options enable us to show or hide the '''print''' and '''email''' icons.

|-
||Go to the '''homepage''' tab in the browser.
Point to the button on the right.
Click on the button.
Point to '''Print''' and '''Email'''.

||Let’s go to the '''homepage''' tab.
On the extreme right side of the '''article''', notice a button with a small wheel and down arrow.
Click on this button.
We can see 2 options:
*'''Print'''
*'''Email'''.

|-
||Click on the '''print''' icon.
Click on the '''print''' icon in the new window.

||Click on the '''print''' icon.
This will open a new window with only the '''article''' and '''print''' button on the right.
Clicking on the '''print''' button will open the default '''print''' dialog box.
The further procedure is the same, as for any print job.

|-
||Click on cross icon to close the window.

||Let's cancel the printing now.

|-
||Go to the admin panel tab in the browser.

||Return to the '''admin panel'''.

|-
||Point to the corresponding icons.

||The '''Show Icons, Show Print Icon''' and '''Show Email Icon''' are all set to '''Show''', by default.
You can change the settings as per your requirement.

|-
||Point to '''Show Hits'''

||Notice, there is an option here to show the number of '''Hits'''.
This indicates the number of times the '''article''' has been viewed.

|-
||Point to '''Show Unauthorised Links and Positioning of the links''' text.

||We will discuss '''Show Unauthorised Links and Positioning of the Links''' in another tutorial.

|-
||Click on '''Save & Close'''.

||Let’s save all the settings now by clicking on '''Save & Close'''.

|-
||Go to the '''homepage''' tab in the browser. Press '''F5.'''

||Go the '''homepage''' tab and refresh the page to see all the changes that we made.

|-
||'''Show Slide 11:'''
(Summary)

||Let us recap.

In this tutorial, we learnt about:
* Status of an '''article'''.
* '''Publishing''' options for an '''article''' and
* '''Global options''' for '''articles.'''

|-
||Switch to Slide 12 & 13:

||Here is another assignment for you.

* Click on '''Options''' in '''Article Manager'''.
* Make changes to display '''Create Date''' and '''Modify Date'''.
* '''Save & Close''' the settings.
* Click on the article '''Benefits of Sodium'''.
* Append the block of text from the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial at the end of this '''article.'''
* '''Save''' the article.
* Do you observe any change in the header information of the '''article''' in the '''homepage'''?

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial '''project.
Please download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 15:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project Team
*conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 16:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||'''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Creating-Articles-in-Joomla/English

2014-11-08T06:16:43Z

Itspriyanka:

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1:'''
Creating Articles in Joomla
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Creating Articles in Joomla'''.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
'''Learning Objectives'''
*Article Manager
*How to create a new article
*How to edit an article
*How to make a copy of an article.
*How to delete an article

|| In this tutorial, we will learn about '''Article Manager ''' in''' Joomla'''. :
We will learn to:
*Create a new '''article'''
*Edit an existing '''article'''
*Make a copy of an '''article''' and
*Delete an '''article'''
|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Versions and OS

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 2.5.22
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 1.8.2

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
Prerequisites

|| To follow this tutorial, you need to have '''Joomla 2.5.22''' installed on your system.

|-
|| '''Switch to the browser'''
Type''' http://localhost/joomla/administrator'''

|| Let's open '''Joomla''' administrative panel first.
Let's go to the browser and type ''' http://localhost/joomla/administrator'''

|-
||

|| Enter your '''User Name''' and '''password''' and click on '''Log In''' button.

|-
|| Type username as '''admin''' and password as ''' admin123'''

|| I will enter my '''username''' as '''admin ''' and '''password ''' as '''admin123'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Log in'''

|| I will leave the language option as ''' Default.'''
Click on ''' Log In.'''

|-
||

|| We are now on the '''Joomla Control Panel'''.

|-
||
|| I am zooming in so that the text is more readable.
Only 9 icons are visible on the tutorial screen, due to the zooming.

|-
||
|| Let's go to the '''Article Manager''' page.

|-
||
|| There are 2 ways to reach the '''Article Manager '''page.

|-
|| Point to ''' Article Manager ''' icon but don't click.
|| Click on ''' Article Manager ''' icon in the ''' Joomla''' ''' Control Panel.'''

|-
|| Click on Content in top menu >> Click on ''' Article Manager'''
|| Click on ''' Content''' in the top menu and then on ''' Article Manager'''

|-
|| Point to the toolbar on the top right.
|| Notice there are some icons on the upper right toolbar area. You can use these to create, modify and delete articles. You can also '''archive''', '''publish''' and '''unpublish''' them.

|-
||
|| Let us now learn how to create an '''article'''.

|-
||

|| There are 2 ways to create an '''article''' in '''Joomla '''from the '''Article Manager '''page.

|-
|| Point to the '''New''' icon but do not click it.
|| Click on the ''' New''' icon on the toolbar of the ''' Article Manager page ''' or

|-
|| Click on the '''Add New Article''' in the submenu but do not click it.
|| Click on '''Content''' in the top menu, then '''Article Manager''' and then the submenu '''Add New Article'''.

|-
|| Click on '''New '''icon
|| I will click on the '''New '''icon in the toolbar on the top right.

|-
|| Article Creation Page
|| We are now on the new '''article '''creation page.

|-
|| Point to the toolbar on the top right.
|| This page has a toolbar at the top right.

|-
||
|| Let me move to the left of the page.

|-
||Highlight '''Title''', '''Category ''' and '''Article Text'''

|| Values for a few fields are to be provided in the panel below the page title.
''' Title''', '''Category''' and '''Article Text''' are the mandatory fields while creating an article.

|-
|| Point to the red asterix.
|| These are indicated by the all too familiar red asterix.

|-
|| Title : ''' Sodium'''
|| Let's create an '''article '''now.
Type '''Sodium''' as the title''' ''' of the '''article'''.

|-
|| Category:''' Uncategorised'''
|| Default value of ''' category''' is '''Uncategorised'''.
Let's leave it as it is.

|-
||
|| Next, we will put some text into the text box: '''Article Text'''.
You can put any text of your choice here.

|-
|| Click on ''' Gedit''' editor in the ''' launcher bar'''.
Copy the text by doing Ctrl+C >> Go to the browser >> Paste the text by doing Ctrl+V
|| I will copy the text that I have in my '''Gedit''' editor and paste it in the '''article text'''.

|-
|| Highlight ''' Featured'''
|| There is a field called ''' Featured''' which is a dropdown with options '''Yes''' and '''No'''.

|-
||
|| A '''featured''' '''article''' is one which will be displayed on the homepage of a website.

|-
|| Select ''' Yes''' in the ''' Featured''' dropdown
|| I will select '''Yes ''' in the '''Featured''' dropdown.

|-
||
|| Let's now save and close the article.
Go to the toolbar at the top right corner of the page.

|-
|| Click on ''' Save & Close'''
|| There are various '''save '''options here.
Out of the given options, I will click on '''Save & Close.'''
''' Save & Close''' option will save the '''article''' and take us back to the ''' Article Manager'''.

|-
||
|| Lets open our webpage and see the article we have created.

|-
||Click on ''' View Site'''
|| On the top right on the administrative panel, there is a link ''' View Site'''. Click on it.

|-
||Point to the article on the homepage.
|| We are on our homepage and you can see the article '''Sodium''' that we created on the homepage.

|-
||
||Lets close the browser window and go back to the administrative panel.

|-
||
||Now let us learn to edit an existing '''article'''.
We will edit the '''article''' that we have just created.

|-
|| Go to the admin panel.
Click on '''Sodium'''
||Look for the '''article''' in the '''Article Manager''' and click on its title.
Right now, we have only one '''article'''. So we will click on the ''' article''' '''Sodium'''.

|-
|| Type: ''' Sodium is one of the essential minerals required by our body ''' in the ''' Article Text ''' above the text already written there.
||It opens the page with the title: '''Article Manager: Edit Article. '''
I am going to add a line at the beginning of the text: '''Sodium is one of the essential minerals required by our body.'''

|-
||

||This time let us choose another option to save the changes in the article.

|-
||Click on ''' Save''' in the top right toolbar.
||Click on '''Save''' in the toolbar. It will save the article and load the page with '''Edit Article'''.
Which indicates that the article is still open for editing.

|-
||
||Lets go to the website and verify our changes.

|-
||Click on ''' View Site'''.
||Click on '''View Site''' on the top right of the page.

|-
||Scroll down and highlight the modification.
||Scroll down to see that the article is edited.

|-
||Switch to the admin panel.
||Close the browser window and go back to the administrative panel.

|-
||Point to ''' Save as Copy'''.
||To make a copy an existing article, there is an option '''Save as Copy ''' in the toolbar.
Let us try it.

|-
||Click on ''' Save as Copy'''.
||Click on''' Save as Copy''' icon.
This creates a new '''article,''' which is a copy of our original one, '''Sodium.'''

|-
||Highlight the ''' Title''' text
||Note that the system has generated a new title, '''Sodium (2),''' for the copied article.

|-
||
||Let us give the copied article a title of our choice.

|-
||Type ''' Benefits of Sodium''' in the ''' Title''' text.
Click on '''Save & Close''' in the top right toolbar.
||In the ''' Title ''' textbox, type ''' Benefits of Sodium''' and then click on the ''' Save & Close''' option.

|-
||Point to the title ''' Benefits of Sodium'''.
||We are back to the '''Article Manager ''' page.
See here; we have got a new '''article ''' named '''Benefits of Sodium''' in our list.

|-
||
||Go to the webpage and verify that we have 2 articles on the homepage.

|-
||
||Click on the '''View Site''' on the top right.

|-
||
||Scroll down to see 2 articles: ''' Sodium '''and '''Benefits of Sodium'''.

|-
||'''Slide 5 & 6''':
Assignment:
*Click on the title '''Benefits of Sodium'''.
*Append '''XYZ''' at the end of the text.
*This time choose the last icon, '''Close, ''' from the toolbar.
*In the '''Article Manager''' page, open '''Benefits of Sodium''' again.
*Verify that, this time the changes were not saved.
*Close the '''article''' by clicking on '''Close '''again'''.'''

||Here is a small assignment for you.
Pause this tutorial and do it.
*Click on the title '''Benefits of Sodium'''.
*Append '''XYZ''' at the end of the text.
*This time choose the last icon, '''Close, ''' from the toolbar.
*In the '''Article Manager''' page, open '''Benefits of Sodium''' again.
*Verify that, this time the changes were not saved.
*Close the '''article''' by clicking on '''Close '''again'''.'''

|-
||
||Now go back to the administrative panel.

|-
||Switch to the browser
||We will now see how to delete an '''article''' in '''Joomla'''.

|-
||Select the article '''Sodium.'''
||Since we have two '''articles''', ''' Benefits of Sodium''' and '''Sodium,''' let us delete one of them.
First, click on the check box on the left of the '''article Sodium'''.

|-
||Click ''' Trash'''.
||In the toolbar, click on the icon: ''' Trash'''

|-
||Scroll down to show that '''article Sodium''' does not exist in the list.
||In the '''Article Manager''' verify that the '''article Sodium''' is no longer in the list.
The '''article''' has been permanently deleted.

|-
||
||Go to the webpage and verify again if the article is present.

|-
||Click on '''View Site'''
||Click on '''View Site''' on the top right.

|-
||Scroll down to see the article.
||See that we have only 1 article here - '''Benefits of Sodium'''.

|-
||'''Show Slide 7:'''
(Summary)
||Let us recap.
In this tutorial, we learnt about ''' Article Manager.'''
And to:
*Create a new '''article'''.
*Edit an existing '''article'''
*Save a copy of an '''article''' and
*Delete an '''article'''.

|-
||'''Switch to Slide 8:'''

||Here are 2 small assignments for you.
Create two new '''articles''' as instructed below

|-
||'''Slide 8 & 9:'''
||
*Go to the '''Create New Article''' page by clicking on '''Content ''' then '''Article Manager''' and then the submenu '''Add New Article'''.
*Give the title '''Vitamin A ''' to the new '''article.'''
*Select '''Uncategorised''' as the '''category'''.
*Copy-paste the first block of text from the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial into the '''Article Text.'''
*Click on '''Save and New ''' option.
*Observe what happens.

|-
||'''Slide 10 & 11:'''
||
*Give the title '''Iron ''' to the newly opened '''article'''.
*Select '''Uncategorised''' as the '''category'''.
*Copy-paste the second block of text from the '''assignment-text''' file provided with this tutorial into the '''Article Text.'''
*Click on '''Cancel ''' icon'''.'''
*Do you find '''Iron''' in the '''Article Manager'''?
*Understand why or why not.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
||The video at this link, summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.
If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The Spoken Tutorial Project Team
*conducts workshops using spoken tutorials and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.
For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''
(Acknowledgement)
||Spoken Tutorial Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||
||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Creating-Articles-in-Joomla/English

2014-09-24T07:06:58Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with "{| border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Show Slide 1''' Creating Articles in Joomla || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Creating Articles in Joomla'..."

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1'''
Creating Articles in Joomla
||
Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Creating Articles in Joomla'''.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2:'''
'''Learning Objectives:'''
*Article Manager
*How to create a new article
*How to edit an article
*How to delete an article

|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:
'''*Article Manager'''
*How to create a new article
*How to edit an article
*How to delete an article

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Versions and OS

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 2.5.22
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 1.8.2

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
Prerequisites

|| To follow this tutorial, you need to have:
*'''Joomla 2.5.22''' is installed on your system

|-
|| '''Switch to the browser'''

Type''' http://localhost/joomla/administrator'''

|| Lets open our ''' Joomla''' administrative panel first.

So lets go to the browser and type '''http://localhost/joomla/administrator'''

|-
||

|| Enter your '''login id''' and '''password''' and press on Login button.

I will enter my '''login id''' as '''admin '''and '''password '''as '''admin123'''.

We are on the '''Joomla control panel'''.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5: ''' Article Manager

|| We will now learn about the '''Article Manager'''.

'''Article Manager '''is a view in '''Joomla''' administrative panel.

We can view the articles and manage them through the '''Article Manager'''.

|-
|| ''' Show Slide 6: ''' Reaching the Article Manager

|| We can reach the '''article manager''' from the '''control panel ''' by doing 2 actions:

a. Click on the '''Article Manager''' in the first row in the '''control panel''' or

b. Click on the '''Content''' in the top menu and click on '''Article Manager'''.

|-
|| ''' Switch to the browser'''

|| Lets go to the administrative page again.

|-
||

|| Lets understand the '''article manager ''' a little bit.

In the '''article manager''', you can see the that the column headers are all clickable.

It means you can sort the articles using any of them.

By default, articles are sorted by the title.

|-
||

|| '''Article manager''' has filters to make your search faster if there are many articles.

The search in the '''article manager''' works on the title or the alias of the article.

There are other filters based on the ''' category''', '''access''', '''status''' of the article, '''author''' and ''' language''' of the articles.

|-
||
|| '''Status''': This shows the published status of the article.

An article can have 4 possible status:

'''*published''' - meaning it could be displayed on the front-end

'''*unpublished''' – meaning it cannot be displayed

'''*archived''' – meaning it is removed from the article manager by default and put in historical records or

'''*trashed''' – meaning it has been deleted from the system.

|-
||

|| '''Featured''': '''Featured articles''' are the ones which are displayed on the homepage of your website.

|-
||

|| ''' Category''': Shows the category to which the article belongs

|-
||

|| '''Ordering''': Order in which to show the articles.

For example, if there are 3 featured articles, ordering would decide which article would be shown first.

You can change the order by clicking on the header and then either manually changing the order number or by clicking the up and down arrow.

You can save the new ordering by clicking on the '''Save order''' icon.

|-
||

|| '''Access''': It shows the user group which has access to the article.

|-
||

|| '''Created by''', '''Date''', '''Hits''' and '''Language''' are obvious.

|-
||

|| '''ID: ID ''' is the unique identification number for this item in '''Joomla'''. It is automatically assigned by system and cannot be changed.

|-
||

|| On the top right is the toolbar for taking action on the articles.

We see one new action is this, which is '''Check-In'''.

When we open an article, the article is '''locked''' for other admins so they cannot open it for editing.

We can close the article by '''Save''', '''Save & Close''', '''Save and New''', '''Save as Copy''' or '''Close'''.

If we forget to close the article by either going back in the browser navigation or by closing the browser window, it will remain '''locked''', with a '''lock''' icon to the left of the title.

The admin who opened the article will need to '''check-in''' in order to give access to other admins to open it.

|-
||

|| There is also an '''Options''' icon here. These are the global options for all articles.

|-
||

|| In case it is '''ON''', we can turn it ''' OFF''' by editing ''' php.ini ''' in the '''apache installation.'''

|-
||

|| We will now come to article creation.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 7:'''

|| There are three ways we can reach the article creation page in '''Joomla''':

a. Click on the '''Add New Article''' icon in the '''Control Panel'''.

b. Click on the '''New''' icon on the options at top in '''Article Manager'''.

c. Click on '''Content''' in the top menu, then '''Article''' '''Manager''' and then the submenu '''Add New Article'''

|-
|| ''' Switch to the browser'''

|| Lets go to the administrative panel and try creating a new article.

|-
||
|| I will click on the ''' Add New Article''' in the ''' Control Panel'''.

This will open a new article creation page.

|-
||

|| Article creation page has some fields to be filled up and some icons on the top right.

'''Title''', '''Category''' and '''Article Text''' are compulsory fields, which mean you cannot create an article without entering values in these.

Default value of '''category''' is '''Uncategorized'''. Lets create an article.

|-
||

|| We put the title as '''Sodium'''.

I have already created a category called '''Minerals''' and I chose the category here as '''Minerals'''.

Lets put some sample text in the '''Article Text'''. I will copy some text that I have in my '''Gedit''' editor and paste it in the '''article text'''.

|-
||

|| The article can now be saved without entering any more fields.

On the top right, we can see the icon to save.

The '''Save''' icon will only save the article, and load the page with '''Edit Article''' mentioned here.

'''Save & Close''' will save the article and take you back to the '''article manager'''.

'''Save & New''' will save the article and load another '''Add New Article''' page.

'''Cancel''' icon would cancel article creation and go back to the '''article manager'''.

|-
||

|| If you want to edit an existing article, find that article in the '''article manager''' and click on the title of the article.

Clicking on the title of the article will open a page similar to the add new article page, with an added icon on the top right '''Save as Copy'''.

You can make the required changes to edit the article and save it.

|-
||
|| If you click on '''Save as Copy''', a new article, which is a copy of this article would be created.

This copied article will have a different title and alias than the original one.

|-
||

|| We will now see how to delete an article in '''Joomla'''.

Go to the ''' article manager''' and look for the article that you want to delete.

Click on the check box on the left of the article title.

On the top right of the article manager, you can see the option to '''unpublish''' the article or '''trash''' it.

If you are sure you will not need the article later, you can click on '''trash''' icon.

This will remove the article from the system.

Otherwise, '''unpublish''' the article.

|-
||'''Show Slide 8:'''
(Summary)

||Let us summarize.

In this tutorial, we learnt about:

*'''Article Manager'''
*How to create an article
*How to edit an article and
*How to delete an article.

|-
||'''Switch to Slide 9:'''

||Let's come to the assignment now.

You need to create 3 articles.

|-
||

||For the first article, give the title as '''Vitamin A.'''

Select ''' Uncategorized''' as the '''category'''.

Copy the article text from the assignment sheet of this tutorial and paste it as ''' Article Text.'''

Click on '''Save and New '''icon.

|-
||'''Switch to Slide 10:'''

||For the second article, give the title as '''Sodium.'''

Select ''' Uncategorized''' as the '''category'''.

Copy the article text from the assignment sheet of this tutorial and paste it as ''' Article Text'''.

Click on '''Save and Close''' icon.

|-
||'''Switch to Slide 11:'''

||For the third article, give the title as '''Iron.'''

Select ''' Uncategorized''' as the '''category'''.

Copy the article text from the assignment sheet of this tutorial and paste it as ''' Article Text'''.

Click on '''Cancel''' icon.

|-
||'''Switch to Slide 12:'''

||How many articles do you see in the '''Article Manager''' now?

'''Why are there only 2 articles in your Article Manager?'''

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The Spoken Tutorial Project Team
*conducts workshops using spoken tutorials and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 15:'''
(Acknowledgement)

||Spoken Tutorial Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Common-mistakes-and-uninstalling-Joomla/English

2014-08-22T19:26:31Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with '{| border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Show Slide 1''' Common Mistakes when installing Joomla and Uninstalling Joomla || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on …'

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1'''
Common Mistakes when installing Joomla and Uninstalling Joomla
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on
'''Common Mistakes while Installing Joomla and Uninstalling Joomla'''

on a local server.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
'''Learning Objectives'''
*Common Mistakes when installing Joomla
*Solutions to common mistakes
*Uninstall Joomla

|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:
*Common mistakes when installing '''Joomla'''
*Solutions to those mistakes and
*How to uninstall '''Joomla'''
|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Versions and OS

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 2.5.22
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 1.8.2

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
Prerequisites

|| To follow this tutorial, you need to have:
*'''XAMPP''' and '''Joomla ''' installed on your system

You also need to have knowledge of the '''Joomla''' installation process.

If not, check the relevant tutorial in the '''Joomla''' series on the '''spoken tutorial ''' website.

|-
||

|| First of all, let me start '''XAMPP''' on my machine.

|-
|| Open terminal by pressing''' Ctrl+Alt+T'''

|| Let's open the '''terminal''' by pressing''' Ctrl + Alt + T ''' keys.
Alternately, click on the “'''Terminal'''” icon in the launcher bar.

|-
|| Type
'''sudo /opt/lampp/lampp start'''

|| Start ''' XAMPP ''' by typing
'''sudo space slash opt slash lampp slash lampp space start ''' and press''' Enter.'''

|-
||

|| It will prompt for '''administrative''' password.

|-
|| Enter administrator password >> Press Enter

|| Let me enter my '''administrative password''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
||

|| '''Now we have XAMPP running. '''

|-
||

|| Now, let us see the common mistakes one can make during ''' Joomla''' installation.

|-
|| ''' Switch to Slide 5:'''
'''Joomla''' is extracted in a different directory

|| The first mistake one can make is to extract '''Joomla''' in a different directory.

|-
|| ''' Switch to browser'''
Type http://localhost

|| Go the the browser and open the ''' XAMPP ''' page by typing
'''http colon double slash localhost '''and press''' Enter'''

|-
|| In the left menu >> click on '''phpinfo'''()

|| In the menu on the left of the screen, click on '''phpinfo'''().

|-
|| Type ''' Ctrl+F''' and write '''DOCUMENT_ROOT''' in the search window >> Press '''Enter'''

|| Now press '''Ctrl +F ''' keys and search for
'''DOCUMENT underscore ROOT.'''

|-
||

|| Value of '''DOCUMENT underscore ROOT''' will be either
'''*slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs''' or

''' *slash var slash www'''

|-
|| Point or highlight '''/opt/lampp/htdocs.'''

|| In my machine, it is '''slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs.'''

|-
|| Highlight ''' DOCUMENT_ROOT'''

|| Please note that Joomla needs to be extracted in the '''apache DOCUMENT underscore ROOT''' directory.

If this is not the case, the installation setting page would not show up at all.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 6:'''
Output buffering to be turned off.

|| Second common mistake that one can make is to have the '''output buffering ON'''.

|-
|| '''Switch to the browser:'''
On the browser, show the page for 2nd step (pre-installation check)
Highlight ''' output buffering'''

|| In the 2nd step of the installation setup, '''output buffering ''' should be marked as '''OFF.'''

This is a recommended setting and not a required setting. Usually, by default, it is turned '''OFF'''.

If ''' output_buffering '''is '''ON''', installation might proceed successfully.

However, the website might be extremely slow later.

In some cases, installation might hang up at this step itself.

|-
||

|| In case it is '''ON''', we can turn it ''' OFF''' by editing ''' php.ini ''' in the '''apache installation.'''

|-
|| '''(Switch to terminal)'''
Type '''locate php.ini'''

|| We will go to the '''terminal''' window and locate '''php.ini''' first by typing
'''locate space php dot ini '''and press ''' Enter.'''

|-
|| Highlight the ''' php.ini ''' inside''' /opt/lampp/etc'''

|| We may get a number of results for this query.

There will be one result in which '''php.ini''' is inside the etc directory.

This directory is inside the lampp directory inside the opt directory.

This is the one we need to edit.

In my machine, the path to that file is '''slash opt slash lampp slash etc slash php.ini'''

|-
|| Type ''' sudo gedit /etc/php5/apache2/php.ini'''

|| We open the file in '''Gedit text editor ''' by typing
''' sudo space gedit space slash opt slash lampp slash etc slash php dot ini'''

|-
||

|| If prompted, enter your '''admin''' password.
You will have to do so whenever prompted, as we proceed.

|-
||

|| '''Gedit''' is the default text editor preloaded in''' Ubuntu Linux. '''
Alternately, you can use any text editor of your choice.

|-
|| Press ''' Ctrl + F'''.
Type '''output_buffering'''

|| When the file is open, search for '''output underscore buffering'''.

|-
|| Highlight down arrow on the search box in gedit editor to go to the next result.

|| The first search result we get is commented. So we check for the next result.
Here we find the text we are looking for.

|-
|| Change
'''output buffering: 4096'''

to

'''output buffering: off'''

|| Change
''' output_buffering = 4096'''
to
'''output_buffering = off'''

|-
|| Type ''' Ctrl + S'''
Click on the '''File '''menu on top left. Click '''Quit '''

|| We save the file by pressing ''' Control + S ''' keys.
We can then exit the '''Gedit ''' editor.

|-
||

|| We need to restart '''XAMPP''' for the change to get reflected.

|-
|| Switch to the '''terminal'''.
Type '''sudo /opt/lampp/lampp restart'''

|| Switch to the '''terminal'''.

Type

'''sudo space slash opt slash lampp slash lampp space restart.'''

Press ''' Enter.'''

|-
|| (Go to browser, we are already on the Step 2 of the installation page)

|| Now go to the installation page again

|-
|| Click on '''Check Again'''

|| Now click on '''Check Again '''button at the top right, to check the configuration.

|-
|| Highlight '''Output Buffering'''

|| ''' Output Buffering''' is now turned to ''' OFF'''.
So, we can proceed to the next step of installation

|-
|| '''Show Slide 7:'''
''' Configuration file '''not writable:

|| The third mistake you can make is to have '''no write permission '''for the '''configuration file.'''

|-
||'''(Shift to Browser)'''
Highlight the error message on the final step of the installation page.

|| In the last step of installation, you might get an error that says
“'''Your configuration file or directory is not writable or there was a problem creating the configuration file”.'''

This occurs when we forget to give ''' write permission''' to the ''' Joomla''' folder.

|-
||Copy text from the textbox >> '''Ctrl + C'''

|| If this error occurs, you will get some text inside a text box.
We will copy this text using '''Control + C '''keys'''.'''

|-
||

||In this case, we can create a new ''' configuration.php''' file and paste the text into it.

|-
|| Type '''sudo touch /'opt/lampp/htdocs/joomla/configuration.php'''

||We will use the '''touch''' command to create the '''configuration.php '''inside our '''joomla '''folder.

At the command prompt type

'''sudo space touch space slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs slash joomla slash configuration dot php'''

Press '''Enter.'''

|-
|| Type '''sudo gedit /opt/lampp/htdocs/joomla/configuration.php'''

||Then type
'''sudo space gedit space slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs slash joomla slash configuration dot php.'''

Press '''Enter.'''

This will open the file in '''Gedit''' text editor.

|-
|| Paste '''>> Ctrl+V'''

||Paste the copied text inside this file.

|-
||

||Check the file to make sure
*'''left bracket question mark php''' is present as the first line of the file
*and the content is exactly the same

|-
||Type '''Ctrl + S'''

||Save the '''configuration.php''' by pressing '''Control + S '''keys.

|-
||Click on '''File ''' menu on top left, and click on ''' Quit.'''

||We can then exit the '''Gedit ''' editor.

|-
||'''Show Slide 8:'''
Installation folder not deleted.

||Now, we will see the fourth mistake that one can make during the ''' Joomla''' installation.
This is to not delete the '''installation ''' folder in the '''Finish''' step.

|-
||'''Switch to the browser'''
Highlight the '''Remove Installation Folder '''button

||I cannot emphasize the importance of this step enough.
This is one of the most common mistakes.
So, make sure the folder is deleted.

|-
||

||If you get an error in this step, you must remove the folder manually.
I got an error because I am not logged-in as '''linux''' '''superuser''' and don't have '''delete permission'''

|-
||Switch to '''terminal.'''

||So, now let us switch to the ''' terminal.'''
We will delete the installation folder manually from the '''joomla''' folder.

This is mandatory.

|-
||Type '''cd joomla '''
Type ''' sudo rm -rf installation/'''

||So, type
'''cd slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs slash joomla'''

Press '''Enter'''

Then type
''' sudo space rm space hyphen rf space installation forward slash. '''

Press ''' Enter'''

|-
||Switch to the browser
Type ''' http://localhost/joomla'''

||We have now successfully installed ''' Joomla. ''' We can check this by going to the browser and typing
''' http colon double slash localhost slash joomla'''
We can see our webpage.

|-
||'''Show Slide 9:'''
(Uninstalling Joomla)

||We will now talk about uninstalling ''' Joomla'''.

|-
||'''Switch to terminal'''
Type '''sudo rm -rf /opt/lampp/htdocs/joomla/'''

||We need to first delete the folder into which we extracted ''' Joomla.'''
So, I will switch to the '''terminal '''and type

''' sudo space rm space hyphen rf space forward slash opt forward slash lampp slash htdocs forward slash joomla slash'''

|-
||Type '''cd /opt/lampp/htdocs/joomla'''
Highlight the result '''destination directory does not exist'''

||Now type
'''cd forward slash opt forward slash lampp slash htdocs slash joomla slash '''

This is to check if the folder is deleted.

As you see, the directory does not exist.

|-
||Switch to browser
Go to''' ''' http://localhost/phpmyadmin

||We will then delete the database and the users.
This step will uninstall '''Joomla '''completely.

I will first go to the browser and type

'''http colon double slash localhost slash phpmyadmin'''

|-
||Click on '''Users ''' tab
Select user ''' Joomla-1'''

||I will click on the ''' Users ''' tab and select the user ''' Joomla-1'''

|-
||Select''' Drop the databases that have same names as the users'''

||Below, there is an option
'''Drop the databases that have same names as the users'''.

Click on it.

|-
||Click '''OK''' in confirmation prompt

||This will give you a prompt
''' You are about to DESTROY a complete database. Do you really want to execute DROP DATABASE.'''

Click on '''OK.'''

|-
||Click on '''GO ''' in the bottom right

||Now click on '''GO''' button at the bottom right.

|-
||

||We have now successfully uninstalled ''' Joomla''' from our '''localhost'''.

|-
||'''Show Slide 10:'''
(Summary)

||Let us summarize.
In this tutorial, we learnt about:
*Common Mistakes and their solutions when installing '''Joomla'''
*and to ''' uninstall Joomla'''

|-
||'''Show Slide 11:'''
(Assignment)

||Let's come to the assignment now.

*Install ''' Joomla.'''
*Uninstall''' Joomla'''
*Check if ''' Joomla''' is indeed uninstalled and
*Install '''Joomla''' once again

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''
(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The Spoken Tutorial Project Team
*conducts workshops using spoken tutorials and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 14:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||Spoken Tutorial Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Joomla/C2/Installing-Joomla-on-a-local-server/English

2014-08-22T07:14:39Z

Itspriyanka: Created page with '{| border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Show Slide 1''' Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Installing Joomla on local server''' || Welcome to the Spoken T…'

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 1'''
Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Installing Joomla on local server'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Installing Joomla on local server'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 2'''
'''Learning Objectives'''

* Download Joomla
* Create database
* Permissions
* Install Joomla

|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:
* Obtain '''Joomla'''
* Create '''database'''
* Permissions and
* Install '''Joomla'''

|-
|| '''Show Slide 3'''
Systems Prerequisites

|| To install '''Joomla''' in your system, you should have a system supporting:
*'''Apache''' 2.x + or '''IIS''' 7+
*'''MySQL''' 5.0.4 + and
*'''PHP''' 5.2.4 +
Please note that '''MySQL''' 6 and higher versions are currently not supported.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 4'''
Installation of Apache, MySQL and PHP

|| You can either install these separately or together, using a web-server distribution like
*'''XAMPP'''
*'''LAMP''' or
*'''WAMP'''
Web-server distributions give you '''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' bundled in one.
Refer to the '''PHP & MySQL''' spoken tutorials, for more details on '''XAMPP''' installation.

|-
|| '''Show Slide 5'''
Versions and OS

|| For this tutorial, we will be using:
*'''Ubuntu''' 14.04
*'''Joomla''' 2.5.22
*'''Apache''', '''MySQL''' and '''PHP''' obtained through '''XAMPP''' 1.8.2

|-
||

|| First of all, let me check if '''XAMPP''' is installed on my machine.

|-
|| '''Open terminal by pressing Ctrl+T'''

|| Lets open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Ctrl + Alt + T''' keys.
Alternately, click on the '''“Terminal”''' icon in the launcher bar.

|-
|| Type '''sudo /opt/lampp/lampp start'''

|| Start '''XAMPP''' by typing '''sudo slash opt slash lampp slash lampp start'''

|-
||

|| It will prompt for your '''administrative''' password.

|-
|| Enter administrator password >> Press Enter

|| Enter the password for the '''administrator account''' through which you are logged in.

|-
||

|| Let me enter my '''administrative password''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| '''Switch to browser''' http://localhost

|| Now, switch to the browser, and type '''http colon slash slash localhost'''

|-
|| Select '''English'''

|| You may require to select language if you are proceeding with it for the first time.

So, here let us select '''English'''

|-
|| In the left menu >> click on '''phpinfo'''()

|| In the menu on the left of the screen, click on '''phpinfo'''().

|-
|| Type '''Ctrl+F''' and write '''DOCUMENT_ROOT''' in the search window >> Press '''Enter'''

|| Now press Ctrl +F and search for '''DOCUMENT underscore ROOT.'''

|-
||

|| It will be found in the table '''“Apache Environment”.'''

|-
||

|| Value of '''DOCUMENT underscore ROOT''' will be either
*'''slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs''' or
*'''slash var slash www'''

|-
|| Point or highlight '''/opt/lampp/htdocs'''.

|| In my machine, it is '''slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs.'''

|-
||

|| Please note this path.

We are going to install '''Joomla''' here.

|-
|| Download '''Joomla (Browser)'''

'''http://joomla.org/'''

|| First we will download '''Joomla'''.

So, go to the official website of '''Joomla''', which is '''www dot joomla dot org'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Download''' button >>Click on it.

|| You will find a '''Download''' button on this webpage. Click on it.

|-
||

|| You will be redirected to another webpage.

|-
|| Point to the '''“Download Joomla 2.5.22 Full Package, ZIP”'''. >>Click on it.

|| Here, you will see a button that says '''“Download Joomla 2.5.22 Full Package, ZIP”'''.

Click on that button.

|-
|| Click on '''Save File''' >> then on '''OK'''

|| Immediately, a small dialog box will open.

Here click on '''Save File''' option and then click on '''OK.'''

It will download '''Joomla.'''

|-
||

|| At the time of making of this tutorial, latest stable version was 2.5.22.

|-
|| Switch to the '''Downloads''' folder >> Point to the file

|| I have already downloaded this file and it is in my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Extracting Joomla'''

|| Let's create a new folder by the name '''joomla''' in our '''DOCUMENT_ROOT'''.

|-
|| Type
'''sudo mkdir /opt/lampp/htdocs/joomla'''

|| Go to the '''terminal''' window.

So, at the '''prompt''', type

'''sudo space mkdir space slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs slash joomla'''

and press '''Enter'''.

|-
||

|| If prompted, enter your admin password. You will have to do so whenever prompted, as we proceed.

|-
||

|| We now change directory to '''Downloads'''.

|-
|| Click on the folder window.

|| To see the required path, come to the folder window.

|-
|| Keep the cursor on '''Downloads''' in the '''Home''' folder >> see the tool-tip.

|| Move the cursor on '''Downloads''' folder in the '''Home''' folder and see the tool-tip.

On my system it is,
'''slash home slash ravi slash Downloads'''

|-
|| Switch to the Terminal.
Type
'''cd /home/Downloads'''

|| So, in the '''Terminal''', I will type the command:

'''cd space slash home slash ravi slash Downloads'''

and press '''Enter'''.

You will have to type the path shown on your system.

|-
||

|| Now we will extract the contents of the '''zip''' file of this folder into the '''joomla''' folder.

|-
|| Type
'''sudo unzip Joomla_2.5.22-Stable-Full_Package.zip -d /opt/lampp/htdocs/joomla'''

|| At the command prompt, type the command:

'''sudo space unzip space Joomla_2.5.22-Stable-Full_Package space hyphen d space slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs slash joomla'''

and press '''Enter.'''

|-
|| Type '''cd /opt/lampp/htdocs'''

|| To specify the permissions of the folder '''joomla''', let's go to '''DOCUMENT_ROOT'''.

Type,
'''cd space slash opt slash lampp slash htdocs'''
and press '''Enter.'''

|-
|| Type '''ls'''

|| Let us list the files in this directory. So, type '''ls''' and press '''Enter.'''

|-
|| Type '''sudo chmod 777 joomla/'''

|| Let's give '''read''', '''write''' and '''execute permissions''' to the '''owner''' and the '''group members''' of '''joomla''' folder.

|-
||

|| So type -
'''sudo space chmod space 777 space joomla slash'''

and press '''Enter.'''

|-
||'''Show Slide 6:'''

Creating database

|| Before we go ahead with the installation, we need to create a database for '''Joomla'''.

We will do this in '''phpmyadmin'''.

'''Phpmyadmin''' is the graphical user interface for '''MySQL'''.

It comes along with '''XAMPP''' installation.

|-
|| Switch to the browser and type http://localhost

||Switch to the browser and type
'''http colon slash slash localhost'''

|-
|| Creating Database:
Click on '''phpmyadmin'''

||On the '''XAMPP''' page, in the menu on the left, under '''Tools''', click on '''phpmyadmin'''.

|-
||

||We can also create the database and user on '''MySQL''' command line.

|-
||

||However, '''phpmyadmin''' is much simpler and user friendly.

|-
|| Click on '''Users''' >> click on '''Add User'''

||Click on '''Users''' in the top menu and then click on '''Add User''', to create a new user.

|-
||Type '''Joomla-1'''

||Enter a '''username''', let's say, '''Joomla-1'''

|-
||Select '''Local''' from the dropdown

||From '''Host''' dropdown list, select '''Local'''.

|-
||In '''Password''' textbox >> Type '''joomla123'''

||Enter a '''password''' in the '''Password''' text-box, say '''joomla123'''.

You can enter any password of your choice.

|-
||Re-type '''joomla123'''

||Enter the same password in the '''Re-type''' textbox.

|-
||Point to the option

||Note – Pls do not respond to '''Generate Password''' prompt for now.

|-
||Point to '''Create a database with the same name and grant all privileges'''

||Under '''Database for user''', we can see the option
'''Create a database with the same name and grant all privileges.'''

|-
||Click on it >> Click on '''Go''' button

||We will check that option and click the button '''Go''' at the bottom right of this page.

|-
||

||This will create a new '''database''' with the name '''Joomla-1''' and with a user '''Joomla-1'''.

|-
||

||Make a note of the '''username''', '''password''' and '''database''' names.

These will be required later to complete the '''Joomla''' Installation.

|-
||'''Show Slide 7:'''
Rules and Naming Conventions

||Please note:
*'''Database''' name and '''username''' need not be the same.
*To have different names, you can first create the '''database''' and then create a user for that '''database'''.
*Also, as per naming convention; '''username''' should not have any spaces in between.

|-
||'''Show Slide 8:'''
Prerequisites completed

||We are now ready to install '''Joomla'''.

We have '''XAMPP''' running and our '''database''' is ready.

And we have extracted '''Joomla''' into the folder '''joomla''' in '''DOCUMENT_ROOT'''.

|-
||'''(Switch to browser)'''

http://localhost/joomla

||Go to the browser.

Type '''http colon forward slash forward slash localhost forward slash joomla'''

Pls note – '''joomla''' is the folder into which we extracted.

|-
||Press '''Enter'''

||Press '''Enter''' and you will see the '''Joomla''' installation page.

|-
||

||By default, we are in step number one, that is, '''Language'''.

'''Joomla''' can be installed in multiple languages.

|-
||Select ''English''' >> click on '''Next''' button.

||We will select '''English (United states)''' here.

Click on '''Next''' button at the top right.

|-
||Click on '''Next''' button.

||We are at the '''Pre-Installation Check''' stage.

Let’s go with the default options.

Click on '''Next''' button at the top right.

|-
||Click on '''Next''' button.

||Now we are on the '''Licence''' page.

Please read and click '''Next''' at the top right.

|-
||'''Database (browser):'''

Select '''MySQL''' from DropDownList

||So, we come to the '''Database Configuration''' page now.

Select '''“MySQL”''' as the '''database type'''.

|-
||Type '''localhost'''

||Enter '''“localhost”''' as the '''Host Name'''

|-
||Point to '''username''', '''password''' and '''database name'''.

||Now, we have to enter the '''username''', '''password''' and '''database names'''.

These are the ones we created earlier, in '''phpmyadmin'''.

|-
||Type '''Joomla-1'''

||I will enter '''Joomla-1''' as the '''username'''.

|-
||Type '''joomla123'''

||Then '''joomla123''' as the '''password'''

|-
||Type '''Joomla-1'''

||and '''Joomla-1''' as the '''database name.'''

|-
||

||Leave the '''table prefix''' as it is.

|-
||Select '''Backup''' >> Click '''Next'''

||In '''Old Database Process''', select '''Backup'''.

This is to take backup of tables, with identical names as in the database, when '''Joomla''' is upgraded.

Click on '''Next''' button at the top right.

|-
||

||This step may take some time.

Its because the server tries to connect to the database and check the configurations.

It will give an error if '''MySQL''' is not running or if you have given any incorrect details.

|-
||'''FTP Configurations (browser)'''

||Next step is the '''FTP Configuration.'''

We don’t need to enable '''FTP''' because we are installing '''Joomla''' on our local server.
So, click on ''' Next''' button at the top right.

|-
||'''Main configuration (browser):'''

Type''' Digital India'''

||We are now on the ''' Main''' ''' Configuration''' page.

Enter the site name that you want your website to have.

I will write it as ''' Digital India'''

|-
||Type '''priyanka@spoken-tutorial.org'''

||Email id is a compulsory field. Please enter a valid email id here.

I will give the id as ''' priyanka@spoken-tutorial.org'''

|-
||

||Next, enter the ''' username''' that you want for the ''' Joomla''' administrative page.

|-
||Type''' admin'''

||I will enter ''' username''' as ''' admin.'''

|-
||Type''' ''' '''admin123'''

||Enter a password for the ''' Joomla''' administrator.
I will enter ''' admin123 ''' as the ''' Admin password.'''

|-
||Retype''' admin123'''

||Retype the password in the confirmation box.

|-
||Point to the button '''Install Sample data'''

||There is a button named ''' Install Sample Data''' below the '''admin''' details.
This will install the site with some sample articles, menus, plugins etc.
These help a beginner to understand ''' Joomla'''.

|-
||Click''' Next'''

||You may press this button if you wish, when you are installing ''' Joomla''' for the first time.
I will not do so.
Click ''' Next''' button at the top right.

|-
||'''Final Step (browser and terminal)'''

||We are on the '''Finish '''page, the final step in the installation process.
Here it informs about Joomla's security feature. Pls read this message.

|-
||'''Click Remove Installation Folder button'''

||Under the message, there is a ''' Remove Installation Folder ''' button.
Click on it to remove the installation folder.

|-
||

||If you get an error in this step, you must remove the folder manually.
I got an error because I am not logged-in as ''' linux''' ''' superuser''' and don't have ''' delete permission'''.

|-
||Switch to '''terminal.'''

Type '''cd joomla '''
Type ''' sudo rm -rf installation/'''

||So, now let us switch to the ''' terminal.'''
We will delete the installation folder manually from the '''joomla''' folder. This is mandatory.

So, type
'''cd joomla'''.

Then type
'''sudo space rm space hyphen rf space installation forward slash. '''

|-
||Switch to browser

'''Type localhost/joomla'''

||After successful removal of the installation folder, switch to the browser.
Type
'''localhost forward slash joomla'''

You have reached your website!

|-
||

||Since I did not install sample data, I do not see '''menus, articles''' etc., right now.

|-
||Type ''' localhost/joomla/administrator/'''

||Lets go to the '''administrator page ''' from where we can administer our website.

So, go to
'''localhost forward slash joomla forward slash administrator forward slash'''

|-
||Type ''' admin'''

Type ''' admin123'''

||Login with your '''administrator ''' login and password.
I will type '''admin '''in '''username''' and '''admin123''' in '''password'''.

|-
||

||As your website is installed, you have the ''' administrator access.'''

|-
||'''Show Slide 9:'''
(Summary)

||Let us summarize.

In this tutorial, we learnt to:
*Install '''Joomla''' from '''Joomla''' website
*Create database in '''phpmyadmin'''
*Install '''Joomla''' on local server

|-
||'''Show Slide 10:'''

(Assignment)

||Let's come to the assignment now.

*Install ''' Joomla''' with the sample data.
*Uninstall '''Joomla''' and then install a fresh '''Joomla''' without sample data.
*Compare the difference.

|-
||'''Show Slide 11:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)

||The video at this link, summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
||'''Show Slide 12:'''

(About Spoken Tutorial Project)
Slide will be as given earlier

||The Spoken Tutorial Project Team
*conducts workshops using spoken tutorials and
*gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Show Slide 13:'''

(Acknowledgement)

||Spoken Tutorial Project is supported by '''NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.'''

|-
||

||This is Priyanka signing off. Thank you for joining.

|-
|}